hp LaserJet 3300mfp
use
hp LaserJet 3300mfp
user guide
Copyright Information
Warranty
Trademark Credits
© Copyright 2002, Hewlett-Packard Company
The information contained in this document is
subject to change without notice.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
All Rights Reserved. Reproduction,
adaptation, or translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except as allowed
under the copyright laws.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any
kind with respect to this information.
All other products mentioned herein may be
trademarks of their respective companies.
HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
A user of the Hewlett-Packard printer
associated with this user guide is granted a
license to: a) print hard copies of this user
guide for PERSONAL, INTERNAL or
COMPANY use subject to the restriction not to
sell, re-sell or otherwise distribute the hard
copies; and b) place an electronic copy of this
user guide on a network server, provided
access to the electronic copy is limited to
PERSONAL, INTERNAL users of the
Hewlett-Packard printer associated with this
user guide.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for any
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential,
or other damage alleged in connection with
the furnishing or use of this information.
Part number: C9124-90909
Edition 2, February 2002
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
Contents
Identifying your product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HP LaserJet 3300mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HP LaserJet 3300se mfp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
HP LaserJet 3310mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
HP LaserJet 3320mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
HP LaserJet 3320n mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
HP LaserJet 3330mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Identifying your product’s hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
HP LaserJet 3300 series hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Identifying your product’s control panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fax controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Alphanumeric buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Menu and cancel controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Copy, scan, and start controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Identifying HP Jetdirect 310x print server components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Identifying your product’s software components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Finding a location for your product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connecting a printer cable to your product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installing a print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Installing and loading the media input trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Installing the ADF input tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting the power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Loading originals to copy or scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
To load originals onto the flatbed scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
To load originals into the ADF input tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Verifying your work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To self-test the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To self-test the copier using the ADF input tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To self-test the copier using the flatbed scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
To print a control panel menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
HP LaserJet 3300 series product settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Printing a configuration page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
To print a configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Printing a control panel menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
To print a control panel menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Restoring the factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
To restore the factory default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Changing the display panel language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To change the display panel language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Changing the default paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To change the default paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the product’s volume controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To change the alarm volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To change the volume for the fax product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
EN
3
To change the ring volume of the fax product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
To change the control panel key press volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing settings from your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
To change default settings across all applications (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
To change default settings across all applications (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Printing with manual feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
To print using manual feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Stopping or canceling a print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Understanding print quality settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
To temporarily change print quality settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
To change print quality settings for all future jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
To enable EconoMode (save toner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Optimizing print quality for media types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
To access the optimizing feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Printing envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
To print one envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
To print multiple envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Printing transparencies and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
To print transparencies or labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Printing letterhead or preprinted forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
To print letterhead or preprinted forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Printing custom-sized media or card stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
To print custom-sized media or card stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Printing on both sides of the media (manual duplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
To duplex manually on lightweight media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
To print multiple pages on a single sheet (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
To print multiple pages on a single sheet (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Printing booklets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
To print booklets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Printing watermarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
To access the watermark feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Starting a copy job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Canceling a copy job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Adjusting copy quality for the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
To adjust the copy quality for the current job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Adjusting the default copy quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
To adjust the copy quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Adjusting the lighter/darker (contrast) setting for the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
To adjust the lighter/darker setting for the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Adjusting the default lighter/darker (contrast) setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
To adjust the default lighter/darker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reducing or enlarging copies for the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
To reduce or enlarge copies for the current job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Adjusting the default copy size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
To change the default copy size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing the copy collation setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
To change the copy collation setting for the current job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4
EN
To change the default copy collation setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing the number of copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
To change the number of copies for the current job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
To change the default number of copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using HP LaserJet Copier software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
To access HP LaserJet Copier (Windows or Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using HP LaserJet Copy Plus software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Copying photos, two-sided originals, or books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
To copy or scan a photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
To copy a multiple page stack of 2-sided originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
To copy a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Understanding scanning methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Scanning from the product’s control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
To scan from the product’s control panel using the start scan button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
To use the scan to button via USB or parallel connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To use the scan to button via network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To reprogram the scan to button destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To reprogram the start scan button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Canceling a scan job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Scanning with the product software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
To scan using HP LaserJet Director (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
To scan using HP LaserJet Director (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
To use page-by-page scanning (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
To use page-by-page scanning (Macintosh). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Scanning with TWAIN-compliant software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
To use flatbed scanner preview scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Archiving scanned text or images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
To archive a scanned image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
To use the archive feature (Macintosh). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Scanning with OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
To edit scanned text (Windows and Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
To change the OCR word processing application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
To use HP LaserJet Director’s OCR feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
To access image enhancement features (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Adding annotations to HP documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
To change the annotation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adding annotations to scanned image files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Sending scanned items as e-mail attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
To scan to e-mail (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
To scan to e-mail (Macintosh). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
To e-mail scanned files in an alternative mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Scanner resolution and color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Resolution and color guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Setting the information in the fax header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
To set the fax header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting the answer mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
To set the answer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
EN
5
Loading originals to fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
To load fax documents into the ADF input tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
To send a fax to one recipient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
To send a fax to multiple recipients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
To send a fax using a group-dial code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
To send a fax to an ad hoc group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Canceling a fax job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
To cancel the current fax job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
To cancel a fax job using fax job status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Using manual dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
To use manual dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Deleting faxes from memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
To delete faxes from memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Redialing manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
To redial manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Sending a fax at a future time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
To send a fax at a future time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
To receive faxes when you hear fax tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
To reprint a fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
To block or unblock fax numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Receiving faxes to your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
To turn the receive to PC setting off from the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
About speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
To program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
To delete speed-dial codes and one-touch keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
To quickly program speed-dial codes or one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
To program a one-touch key for alternate long distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Managing group-dial codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
To program group-dial codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
To delete group-dial codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
To delete an individual from a group-dial code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Deleting all phone book entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
To delete all phone book entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using dialing characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Dialing character table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
To insert a pause or wait. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Inserting a dial prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
To set the dial prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Using fax forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
To use fax forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using fax polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
To poll (request a fax from) another fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Enabling an extension phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
To enable an extension phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Sending a fax by dialing from a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
To send a fax by dialing from a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing the HP LaserJet 3330 product’s volume settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
To change the fax sounds (line monitor) volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
To change the ring volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing the default resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
To change the default resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the default contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
To change the default contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the detect dial tone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
To change detect dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
6
EN
Changing how the product answers incoming faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
To set the answer mode to automatic or manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Changing rings-to-answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
To set the number of rings-to-answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Changing answer ring patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
What is ring pattern service?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
How do I get the service? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
How will I know if it is working?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
To change answer ring patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Changing the silence-detect mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
To change the silence detect mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Changing autoreduction settings for incoming faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
To change autoreduction for incoming faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Enabling stamp received faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
To enable stamp received faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting the fax error correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
To change the error correction setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Selecting tone- or pulse-dialing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
To select tone- or pulse-dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Changing redial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
To turn the redial on busy option on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To turn the redial on no answer on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Using billing codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To turn billing codes on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Changing the V.34 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To turn the V.34 setting on or off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Managing fax logs and reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Printing the fax activity log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
To print the fax activity log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Setting the fax activity log to print automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To set the fax activity log to print automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Printing a fax call report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To print a fax call report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Setting fax call report print times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To set fax call report print times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Including the first page of each fax on the fax call report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
To include the first page of each fax on the fax call report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Printing a phone book report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
To print a phone book report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Printing the billing codes report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
To print the billing codes report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Printing a T.30 protocol trace report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
To print a T.30 protocol trace report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
To set T.30 protocol trace report print times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Printing the block fax list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
To print the block fax list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Printing all fax reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
To print all fax reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Understanding the print server’s features and benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Using network protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Network connection requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Installing the 310x print server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
To connect the product to a network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Installing the network software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
EN
7
Using the embedded web server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Compatible web browsers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
To start the embedded web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using HP Web JetAdmin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setting up the BOOTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Bootptab file entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Using DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
UNIX servers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Windows NT 4.0 servers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Windows 2000 servers:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Configuring the print server for DHCP configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Moving to another network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Printing a print server configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
To print a Jetdirect configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
For more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Cleaning the outside of the product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
To clean the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
To clean the glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
To clean the lid backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Cleaning the print cartridge area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
To clean the print cartridge area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cleaning the printer media path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
To clean the printer media path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cleaning the pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
To clean the pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Changing the pickup roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
To change the pickup roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Changing the printer separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
To change the printer separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Installing a new ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
To install a new or replacement ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Changing an ADF pickup roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Removing and replacing the control panel bezel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Product media specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Supported media sizes (printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Guidelines for using media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Common media problems table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Card stock and heavy media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Selecting media for the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Ordering HP parts and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
HP parts and accessories chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Power modules (network model only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
HP LaserJet print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
8
EN
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
To install a print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Storing print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Print cartridge life expectancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Recycling print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Saving toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
DIMMs (memory or font) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
To test a DIMM installation or removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
To install a DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
To remove a DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Product will not turn on or print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pages print but are totally blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pages did not print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Pages printed, but there was a problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Onscreen error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Paper handling problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Print is skewed (crooked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
More than one sheet feeds at one time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Product does not pull media from the media input tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Media curls when fed through product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Printed page is different from what appeared onscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Clearing media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
To clear a media jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
To clear other media jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tips to avoid media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Improving print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Light print or fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Toner specks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Dropouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Vertical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Gray background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Toner smear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Loose toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Vertical repetitive defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Misformed characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Page skew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Curl or wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Wrinkles or creases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Toner scatter outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Control panel error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Critical error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Alert messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
No copy came out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Copies are blank, or images are missing or faded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Improving copy quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Preventing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Clearing ADF media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
To clear a media jam from the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Removing a jammed ADF page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Identifying and correcting copy defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Vertical white or faded stripes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
EN
9
Blank pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Too light or dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Unwanted lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Black dots or streaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Unclear text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Reduced size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Scanned image is of poor quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Part of the image did not scan or text is missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
The text cannot be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
The scan takes too long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Error messages appear on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
The scanner did nothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Improving scan quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Preventing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Identifying and correcting scan defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Blank pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Too light or dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Unwanted lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Black dots or streaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Unclear text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Reduced size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fax phone problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
The document stops feeding during faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Is the document too large or too small for the ADF?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Are there problems with the fax machine you are sending to? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Are there problems with the phone line?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
The product is receiving faxes but not sending them . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Is your product on a PBX system? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Is there a poor phone connection? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Outgoing fax calls keep dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Faxes you send are not arriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Is the receiving fax machine off or does it have an error condition?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Is the fax still waiting in memory? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
All of the numbers in a long fax number cannot be dialed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Unable to start receiving faxes from an extension phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the extension phone setting disabled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the telephone cord securely connected?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Voice calls are not being received
by the phone or answering machine connected to the line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the phone cord connected properly?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the answering machine or phone functioning? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Incoming fax calls are not being answered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the answer mode set to manual? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the rings-to-answer setting set correctly? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the answer ring pattern feature turned on? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Is the phone cord connected properly?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Are there too many devices connected to the phone line? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Is the phone line working? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Is the product out of paper? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
10
EN
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Are you sending or receiving a very complex fax? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is the resolution at which the fax was sent or received very high? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is there a poor phone line connection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Faxes are not printing or are printing incorrectly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is there media in the media input tray?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is the receive to PC option selected? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Faxes are printing on two pages instead of one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is the autoreduction setting set correctly?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Received faxes are too light or are printing only on half of the page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Did the product run out of toner while printing a fax? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fax activity logs or call reports are not printing correctly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Are the activity log and call report settings correct? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
The volume is too high or low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Do the volume settings need to be adjusted?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Troubleshooting overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
ON and READY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Is your printer ON and READY? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
USB OK? (USB light ON solid green?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
What is the state of the USB light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Power/Status OK? (Power/Status light ON solid green?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10/100 link OK? (10 light or 100 light ON solid green?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Check the print server’s I/O status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Configuration page does not print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
03 LAN Error: EXTERNAL LOOPBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
08 LAN Error: INFINITE DEFERRAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
11 LAN Error: RETRY FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12 LAN Error: NO LINKBEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Resetting the 310x print server to factory defaults (cold reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Interpreting the configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
USB port information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Network statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
TCP/IP protocol information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
IPX/SPX protocol information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Novell/NetWare protocol information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
AppleTalk protocol information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
DLC/LLC protocol information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Browse hp.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Appendix A
Specifications and regulatory information
HP LaserJet 3300 series product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
HP LaserJet 3300 series product specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Laser safety statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
FCC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Canada DOC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Laser statement for Finland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
EN
11
Korean EMI statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Japan VCCI Class B regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
HP LaserJet 3330 fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
HP LaserJet 3330 product fax specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
FCC Part 68 Requirements (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Telephone consumer protection act (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
IC CS-03 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Regulatory information for EU countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
HP Jetdirect 310x print server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
HP Jetdirect 310x print server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
FCC compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Japan VCCI Class 1 regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Korean EMI statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Chinese safety statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Environmental product stewardship program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Protecting the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Ozone production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Energy consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Toner consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Paper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Plastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
HP LaserJet printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
HP printing supplies returns and recycling program information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
US returns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Non-US returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Material restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Material safety data sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Extended warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Spare parts and consumables availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
For more information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
HP LaserJet 3300 series product battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Appendix B
Warranties and licensing
HP software license agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
HP limited warranty statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Appendix C
Service and support
Obtaining hardware service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
To obtain hardware service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Extended warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Service information form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
12
EN
Identifying your product
Use these topics to learn about your product’s features and to make sure your package contents
are complete:
●
●
●
●
●
●
HP LaserJet 3300mfp
The HP LaserJet 3300mfp prints and copies up to 15 pages per minute (ppm) and comes
standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, 32 MB of RAM, a dual in-line memory module (DIMM)
slot for adding fonts and memory, a USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port.
1
4
2
5
3
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet media input tray
and priority input tray.
14 1 Getting to know your product
EN
HP LaserJet 3300se mfp
The HP LaserJet 3300se mfp prints and copies up to 15 pages per minute (ppm) and comes
standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, 32 MB of RAM,, a dual in-line memory module (DIMM)
slot for adding fonts and memory, a USB 1.1 certified port, an IEEE 1284-B parallel port,
and specialized software. This product is available only in the U.S.
1
2
4
5
3
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet media input tray
and priority input tray.
EN
Identifying your product 15
HP LaserJet 3310mfp
The HP LaserJet 3310mfp is a copier-centric product that prints and copies up to 15 pages per
minute (ppm) and comes standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, a 50-page automatic document
feeder (ADF), 32 MB of RAM, a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot for adding fonts and memory,
a USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port. The HP LaserJet 3310 product has
no control panel scan buttons.
1
4
2
5
6
3
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet media input tray
and priority input tray; 6) ADF input tray.
Note
Scanning with the HP LaserJet 3310 product can be done from your computer with the product
software.
16 1 Getting to know your product
EN
HP LaserJet 3320mfp
The HP LaserJet 3320mfp is a copier-centric product that prints and copies up to 15 pages per
minute (ppm) and comes standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, a 50-page automatic document
feeder (ADF), 32 MB of RAM, a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot for adding fonts and memory,
a USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port.
1
4
2
5
6
3
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet media input tray
and priority input tray; 6) ADF input tray.
EN
Identifying your product 17
HP LaserJet 3320n mfp
The HP LaserJet 3320n mfp is a copier-centric product that prints and copies up to 15 pages per
minute (ppm) and comes standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, a 50-page automatic document
feeder (ADF), 32 MB of RAM, a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot for adding fonts and memory,
Ia USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port.
This product also includes networking capabilities and includes an HP Jetdirect 310x print server
for connecting to a 10Base-T or 100Base-Tx network (sometimes called Ethernet and Fast
Ethernet, respectively). The print server provides network solutions for communicating over
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, Novell Netware, and AppleTalk protocols.
1
4
2
5
3
6
9
7
8
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software, print server software, and electronic user guide;
5) 250-sheet media input tray and priority input tray; 6) ADF input tray; 7) HP Jetdirect 310x print
server with mounting clip; 8) USB 2.0 certified cable; 9) print server power adapter.
18 1 Getting to know your product
EN
HP LaserJet 3330mfp
The HP LaserJet 3330mfp is a copier-centric product that prints and copies up to 15 pages per
minute (ppm) and comes standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, a 50-page automatic document
feeder (ADF), 32 MB of RAM, a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot for adding fonts and memory,
a USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port.
The 3330 also includes full-functionality fax capabilities with V.34 fax, including phone book, fax
polling, and delayed fax features.
1
4
2
5
3
6
7
8
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software, fax software, and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet
media input tray and priority input tray; 6) ADF input tray; 7) fax guide; 8) phone cord.
EN
Identifying your product 19
Identifying your product’s hardware components
HP LaserJet 3300 series hardware components
3
3
1
6
2
13
7
9
8
5
10
11
12
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Printer control panel
Print cartridge door
ADF input tray
Media input tray
Priority input tray
Flatbed scanner lid
Left side panel
Left side panel latch
USB port
10 Parallel port
11 Power receptacle
12 Power switch (220V product)
13 Straight-through output door
20 1 Getting to know your product
EN
Identifying your product’s control panel components
Choose a section of the HP LaserJet 3300 control panel to display.
1
2
3
4
Fax controls
Use the fax controls to send and receive faxes and to change commonly used fax settings. Fax
the fax controls.
EN
Identifying your product’s control panel components 21
Alphanumeric buttons
If you have a fax model, use the alphanumeric buttons to enter data into the product’s display
screen and dial phone numbers for faxing. For information on using alphanumeric key characters
Note
Keypad buttons are numeric on non-fax models.
Menu and cancel controls
Use these controls to choose menu options, determine the product’s status, and cancel the
current job.
22 1 Getting to know your product
EN
Copy, scan, and start controls
Use these controls to change commonly used default settings, to start scanning, and to start
Identifying HP Jetdirect 310x print server components
If you purchased an HP LaserJet 3320n model, an HP Jetdirect 310x print server was included
information about using the print server to connect the product to a network.
3
1
5
2
6
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Test button
Network port
10 and 100 LED lights
Power outlet
USB port
Status indicator lights
EN
Identifying HP Jetdirect 310x print server components 23
Identifying your product’s software components
Note
Software components installed depend on OS, installation type, and the HP LaserJet 3300.
Below are the software items included with your product:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
HP LaserJet Director
HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer
TWAIN Scan Driver
HP LaserJet Fax
HP LaserJet Configuration Utility
HP Photo Center
Read Iris OCR
Uninstaller
24 1 Getting to know your product
EN
Finding a location for your product
Install the product in a location that meets the following requirements:
●
Situate the product on a sturdy, level surface out of direct sunlight and away from dust, open
flames, and ammonia fumes.
●
●
Make sure the environment is well ventilated, free from abrupt temperature or humidity
changes, and within the following limits:
• Temperature: 15 to 32.5° C (59 to 90.5° F)
• Relative Humidity: 10 to 80% humidity (no condensation)
Make sure that there is enough space around the product for media access and proper
ventilation; media fed into the straight-through media path will emerge behind the product.
53 cm (21 inches)
81 cm (32 inches)
26 2 Getting started
EN
Connecting a printer cable to your product
To connect a printer cable to your product, use the following steps:
1
Note
Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 do not support USB cable
connections with the printer. Macintosh computers do not support
parallel cable connections.
1
Open the print cartridge door by pulling the sides of the door
forward as shown.
2
2
3
Open the product’s left side panel by pressing the release latch.
Plug one end of the USB (1) or parallel cable (2) into the correct
socket inside the left side panel as shown.
4
Thread the cable through the left side panel opening as shown, and
close the left side panel.
Note
3
If you are using a USB cable, it should be threaded through the upper
notch in the left side panel. If you are using a parallel cable, it should be
threaded through the lower notch.
2
1
4
EN
Connecting a printer cable to your product 27
Installing a print cartridge
To install a print cartridge, use the following steps:
1
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
1
2
Make sure the print cartridge door is open.
Remove the print cartridge from its packaging, and locate the
sealing tape at the end of the cartridge.
2
3
4
3
To remove the sealing tape from the cartridge, grasp the tape and
pull it straight out from the cartridge. Avoid touching any black toner
on the tape.
4
5
Insert the cartridge as shown, with the arrows pointing into the
product.
Close the print cartridge door. The print cartridge engages when
the door is closed.
Note
If toner gets on your clothing or other fabric, wipe off the toner with a dry
cloth. Wash the items in cold water and air dry.
CAUTION
Hot water or heat from a dryer can set toner into fabric.
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print
cartridges, either new, refilled, or remanufactured. Since they are not
HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality.
5
28 2 Getting started
EN
Installing and loading the media input trays
To install and load the media input tray and the priority input tray, use
the following steps:
1
1
Slide the trays in and down at an angle until they fit securely.
Remove the tape connecting the two trays.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Remove the priority input tray.
Push in the guides past the normal paper size mark.
Roll the paper and place it in the tray.
3
Push down on the paper so it lies flat in the tray.
Push in the bottom guide so it is snug.
Install the priority input tray over the media input tray.
Note
If the media guides are not sufficiently tight, your media may skew and
cause a media jam.
4
5
6
EN
Installing and loading the media input trays 29
Installing the ADF input tray
If your HP LaserJet 3300 series product comes with an ADF, or if you purchased the HP LaserJet
3300 series ADF accessory, use the following instructions to install the ADF input tray:
1
2
Align the two tabs on the input tray with the two grooves in the ADF lid.
Slide the tray into the grooves as shown until the tray snaps into place.
Connecting the power cord
To connect your product to a power source, use the following steps.
1
If you have the 220V product, locate the power switch on the back of the product and make
sure the product is switched off.
2
3
Connect the power cord to the product, as shown (1).
Plug the other end of the power cord directly into a grounded AC outlet (2).
1
2
4
If you have the 220V product, switch on the power. If you have the 110V product, there is no
power switch. It will automatically power on when it is plugged in.
Note
HP does not recommend the use of uninterrupted power supply (UPS) battery backup devices or
surge suppressors with this product. Many surge suppressors and battery backups can cause print
defects.
30 2 Getting started
EN
Loading originals to copy or scan
Use these instructions to load originals into your HP LaserJet 3300 series product for copying or
To load originals onto the flatbed scanner
1
2
3
Make sure the ADF is free of media.
Lift the flatbed scanner cover.
Place the original document face down on the flatbed scanner with the top left corner of the
document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
4
5
Gently close the lid.
The document is ready to be copied or scanned.
Top Edge
CAUTION
To prevent damaging the product, do not allow the scanner lid to fall onto the flatbed scanner surface.
Always close the scanner lid when the product is not in use.
EN
Loading originals to copy or scan 31
To load originals into the ADF input tray
Note
ADF capacity is up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20-pound) media (depending on the thickness of the
media), or until the ADF input tray is full.
The minimum size for media in the ADF is 127 x 127 mm (5 x 5 inches). For smaller sizes use the
flatbed scanner. The maximum size for media in the ADF is 215.9 mm wide by 381 mm long (8.5 x
15 inches).
1
2
Make sure the flatbed scanner is free of media.
Close the flatbed scanner cover and put the top end of the original media stack into the ADF
input tray, with the media stack face up and the first page to be scanned, copied, or faxed on
top of the stack.
3
4
5
Slide the media stack into the ADF until the media does not move any farther.
Adjust the media guides until they are snug.
The document is now ready to be copied or scanned.
4
2
32 2 Getting started
EN
Verifying your work
After setting up the product, verify your work by testing your HP LaserJet 3300 product’s printing
and copying functions.
To self-test the printer
To test the printer, use the following steps:
1
2
3
On the product’s control panel, press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Config Reportand press menu/enter.
A configuration page prints, showing the product’s current configuration and the control panel
To self-test the copier using the ADF input tray
Use the configuration page you just printed to test the copier.
1
2
Adjust the guides on the ADF input tray to the size of the configuration page.
Place the configuration page into the ADF input tray top first, print side up. Verify that the
control panel display reads Document Loaded.
3
On the product’s control panel, press start/copy.
The product makes a copy of the configuration page and the control panel display returns to
2
1
EN
Verifying your work 33
To self-test the copier using the flatbed scanner
If your product does not have an ADF input tray, you can still test the copier by placing the
configuration page on the flatbed scanner.
1
Place the configuration page face down on the flatbed scanner with the top left corner of the
document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
2
3
Gently close the lid.
On the product’s control panel, press start/copy.
The product makes a copy of the configuration page and the control panel display returns to
CAUTION
To prevent damaging the product, do not allow the scanner lid to fall onto the flatbed scanner surface.
Always close the scanner lid when the product is not in use.
To print a control panel menu map
In addition to printing a configuration page, you can also test your product by printing a menu map
that shows all of the control panel menu options.
To print a control panel menu map, use the following steps:
1
2
3
On the product’s control panel, press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Menu Structureand press menu/enter.
A menu map prints, showing all of the product’s control panel menu options. If the menu map does
34 2 Getting started
EN
HP LaserJet 3300 series product settings
Using the product software is often the easiest method to adjust your product settings. The
instructions in this section show how to access the device settings from both the control panel and
the product software.
CAUTION
When changing certain settings in a network environment, you are changing settings for all users.
Printing a configuration page
You can see what product settings are currently selected by printing a configuration page.
To print a configuration page
1
2
3
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Config Reportand press menu/enter.
The product exits the Menu settings and prints the report.
Printing a control panel menu map
You can see all of your product’s control panel menu options by printing a control panel menu map.
To print a control panel menu map
1
2
3
4
On the product’s control panel, press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Menu Structureand press menu/enter.
A menu map prints, showing all of the product’s control panel menu options.
Restoring the factory default settings
This procedure returns all settings to the factory defaults and clears the fax header name and
information to the fax header.) This procedure clears fax numbers and names associated with
one-touch keys and speed-dial codes and deletes any pages stored in memory. The procedure
then automatically restarts the product.
To restore the factory default settings
1
2
3
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Serviceand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Restore Defaults, press menu/enter, and press
menu/enter again to confirm your selection.
4
The product automatically restarts.
36 3 Changing your product’s general default settings
EN
Changing the display panel language
Use this procedure to have the control panel display messages and reports in a language other
than the default for your country/region.
To change the display panel language
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Common Settingsand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Languageand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select the language you want.
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
The product automatically restarts.
Changing the default paper size
The paper size should be set to the size of paper you normally load in the paper input tray. The
product uses this setting for copying, printing reports, and determining autoreduction for incoming
faxes.
To change the default paper size
1
2
3
4
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Common Settingsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Def. Paper Sizeand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button until the size of paper you have loaded appears. You can choose
Letter, Legal, or A4.
5
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Using the product’s volume controls
You can control the volume of the following sounds:
●
The alarm sound the product emits when it requires attention, such as when the printer door is
open.
●
●
●
The beeps emitted when you press control panel buttons.
For the fax product, the phone line sounds for outgoing faxes.
For the fax product, the ring volume for incoming faxes.
To change the alarm volume
The alarm is heard when the device is presenting an alert or critical error message. The alarm
duration length is either one or three seconds, based on the type of error.
1
2
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Common Settingsand press menu/enter.
EN
Changing the display panel language 37
3
4
5
6
Use the < and > buttons to select Volume Settingsand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Alarm Volume.
Use the < and > buttons to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory for the alarm volume is Soft.
To change the volume for the fax product
1
2
3
Press Volume.
Press the < or > button to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory is Soft.
To change the ring volume of the fax product
The ring volume is heard when the device is initially sending or receiving a call. The ring duration
length is based on the local telecom ring pattern length.
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Common Settingsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Volume Settingsand press menu/enter.
Press the < or > button once to select Ring Volumeand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud, and press menu/enter to save
your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory is Soft.
To change the control panel key press volume
The key press volume controls the sound that is made when a control panel button is pressed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Common Settingsand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Volume Settingsand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Key Press Volumeand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory for the control panel key press volume is Soft.
Changing settings from your computer
After installation, you can gain access to printer settings from the product’s printer driver or from
another software application. These settings do not affect other users on a network.
38 3 Changing your product’s general default settings
EN
Use one of the following methods to change your printer settings:
●
●
●
●
You can also change printer settings from the product software. For instructions on using the
product software, see the product software Help.
To change default settings across all applications (Windows)
Windows 95, 98, ME, and XP Home: From the Start menu, select Settings, and select Printers.
Right-click the printer icon and click Properties.
Windows NT 4.0 SP3, 2000, and XP Professional: From the Start menu, select Settings, and
select Printers. For Windows 2000 right-click the printer icon, and click Printing Preferences.
Note
The actual steps may vary; these are the most common methods.
To change default settings across all applications (Macintosh)
Macintosh OS 9.1:
1
2
3
4
5
From the Macintosh desktop, choose File. Then choose Print Desktop.
In the printer group box, choose the HP All-in-one.
Make the necessary changes to the settings.
Click the Save Settings option.
Click Cancel.
Macintosh OS X:
1
2
3
4
5
Open a document in a text editing application.
Choose File. Then choose Print.
Make the appropriate changes to the default settings.
On the settings options, choose to Save Custom Setting.
To invoke the settings when printing a document, choose the Custom option in the Saved
Settings section.
To temporarily change settings from a software application
(Windows)
From the File menu, click Print. From the Print dialog, click Properties. Change the settings that
you want to apply for the current print job.
To temporarily change settings from a software application
(Macintosh)
From the File menu, choose Print. Use the Print dialog to set print options.
Note
The actual steps may vary; these are the most common methods.
EN
Changing settings from your computer 39
40 3 Changing your product’s general default settings
EN
Printing with manual feed
You can use manual feed when printing mixed media, for example, an envelope, then a letter, then
an envelope, and so on. Load an envelope in the priority input tray and load letterhead in the main
input tray.
To print using manual feed
1
Access the printer setup from your software application, and select Manual Feed from the
Source Tray drop-down list. (For instructions on accessing the printer setup from your
2
After you have enabled the setting, wait until the display reads Manual Feed, then press
menu/enter to print each job.
Stopping or canceling a print job
If your print job is currently printing, you can cancel a print job by pressing cancel on the control
panel.
CAUTION
Pressing cancel clears the job currently being processed by the product. If more than one process
is running, it clears the process that currently appears on the display panel.
Printer drivers
When you installed the product software, you selected one of the following printer drivers:
PCL 6 driver: Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of the product’s features. Unless
complete backward compatibility with previous PCL drivers or older printers is necessary, the PCL
6 driver is recommended.
PCL 5e driver: Use the PCL 5e driver if you need print results to look consistent with those from
older HP LaserJet printers. Certain features (FastRes 1200, ProRes 1200, and 300 dpi) are not
available in this driver. (Do not use the PCL 5e driver provided with this printer with older printers.)
PS driver: Use the PostScript (PS) driver for compatibility with PS needs. Certain features
(manual duplexing, printing booklets, watermarks, and printing more than four pages per sheet)
are not available with this driver.
Note
The product automatically switches between PS emulation and PCL printer languages depending
on the driver you have selected. PS emulation emulates Adobe® PostScript Level2. PostScript is a
registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. For information about accessing your printer
Understanding print quality settings
Print quality settings affect how light or dark the print is on the page and the style in which the
graphics are printed. You can also use the print quality settings to optimize the print quality for a
42 4 Printing
EN
You can change the settings in the printer properties to accommodate the types of jobs you are
printing. The following settings are available depending on the printer driver you are using:
●
Best Quality (ProRes 1200): This prints at 1200 dpi (dots per inch) and provides the best
print quality.
●
Faster Printing (FastRes 1200): The resolution is rendered differently so that the job can
print faster. This is the default setting.
●
●
●
●
1200 dpi
600 dpi
300 dpi
Custom: This prints the same as the Faster Printing setting, but you can change the scale
patterns.
●
EconoMode (Save Toner): Text is printed using less toner. This setting is useful when you
are printing drafts.
Note
Changing the resolution can change the formatting of your text.
To temporarily change print quality settings
To change the print quality settings only for the current software application’s use, access the
properties through the Print Setup menu in the application you are using to print. See Changing
To change print quality settings for all future jobs
You can access print quality settings by selecting Printers from the Windows Start menu, then
accessing the properties for the product. The settings are on the Finishing tab (Windows) under
Print Quality settings in the printer properties. To view the details of each setting, click Details. For
Macintosh OS 9.1 select the Imaging Options screen.
To enable EconoMode (save toner)
An excellent way to extend the life of your print cartridge is by using EconoMode. EconoMode
uses substantially less toner than normal printing. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate
for printing drafts or proofs.
To enable EconoMode, access the printer properties. On the Finishing tab (Windows) or the
Imaging Options screen (Macintosh OS 9.1) under Print Quality, select EconoMode. For
Macintosh OS X use the Device Configuration Utility:
1
2
3
4
5
Open the HP LaserJet Director.
Choose Tools.
Choose Device Configuration.
Choose the Print tab.
On the Print Quality menu, choose to turn EconoMode On.
Note
See Changing settings from your computer for instructions on enabling EconoMode for all future jobs.
EN
Understanding print quality settings 43
Optimizing print quality for media types
Media type settings control the temperature of your printer’s fuser. You can change the settings for
the media that you are using to optimize the print quality. The following are the media types that
you can optimize for:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Plain paper
Bond paper
Card stock
Envelope
Heavy paper
Labels
Rough paper
Thin paper
Transparency
To access the optimizing feature
You can access the optimizing feature from the Paper tab in your Windows printer driver. For more
Note
Note
Printing speeds are automatically reduced when printing special-sized media.
You need to reset the default after the job prints.
44 4 Printing
EN
Printing envelopes
Use one of the following methods to print envelopes:
●
●
To print one envelope
Only use envelopes that are recommended for laser printers. See
1
2
3
4
Note
Use the priority input tray for printing one envelope. Use the main input
tray for printing multiple envelopes.
1
2
3
To prevent the envelopes from curling as they print, open the
straight-through output door.
Before loading the envelopes, slide the media guides outward to
slightly wider than the envelopes.
Place the envelope with the stamp end forward and the side to be
printed facing up.
Note
If the envelope has a flap on the short edge, feed that edge into the
printer first.
4
Adjust the media guides to the width of the envelope. Set Optimize
for: on the Paper tab in your Windows printer driver to Envelope,
and print the envelope.
EN
Printing envelopes 45
To print multiple envelopes
Only use envelopes that are recommended for laser printers. See
1
Note
Use the priority input tray for printing one envelope. Use the main input
tray for printing multiple envelopes.
1
2
3
To prevent the envelopes from curling as they print, open the
straight-through output door.
2
Before loading the envelopes, slide the media guides outward to
slightly wider than the envelopes.
Place the envelopes with the stamp end forward and the side to be
printed facing up.
Note
If the envelopes have a flap on the short edge, feed that edge into the
printer first.
3
4
5
Adjust the media guides to the length and width of the envelopes.
Set Optimize for: on the Paper tab in your Windows printer driver
to Envelope, and print the envelope.
Replace the priority input tray.
4
46 4 Printing
EN
Printing transparencies and labels
Only use transparencies and labels that are recommended for use in laser printers, such as HP
CAUTION
Inspect the media to make sure that it is not wrinkled or curled and that it does not have any torn
edges or missing labels. Do not run labels through the product more than once. The adhesive may
damage the product.
To print transparencies or labels
1
2
Open the straight-through output door on the back of the product.
Load a single page in the priority input tray or load multiple pages in the main input tray. Make
sure that the top of the media is forward and the side to be printed (rough side of
transparencies) is facing up.
3
4
Adjust the media guides.
Access the optimizing feature from the Paper tab in your Windows printer driver. Then select
Optimize for: and choose Transparency or Labels in the drop-down list.
5
Print the document. Remove the media from the back of the printer as it prints to prevent it
from sticking together, and place the printed pages on a flat surface.
EN
Printing transparencies and labels 47
Printing letterhead or preprinted forms
Only use letterhead or preprinted forms that are recommended for use in laser printers, such as
information.
Use these instructions to print documents on letterhead or preprinted forms.
To print letterhead or preprinted forms
1
Load the paper with the top forward and the side to be printed facing up. Adjust the media
guides to fit the width of the paper.
2
Print the document.
Note
To print a single-page cover letter on letterhead, followed by a multiple-page document, load the
standard paper in the main input tray first, then load the letterhead into the priority input tray. The
product automatically prints from the priority input tray first.
48 4 Printing
EN
Printing custom-sized media or card stock
HP LaserJet 3300 series products can print on custom-sized media or card stock between 76 by
127 mm. (3 by 5 inches) and 216 by 356 mm. (8.5 by 14 inches). Depending on the media, you
can print up to 10 sheets from the priority input tray. Use the main input tray for more than 10
sheets.
Note
Make sure that the sheets are not stuck together before you load them.
To print custom-sized media or card stock
1
2
Open the straight-through output door.
Load the media with the narrow side forward and the side to be printed facing up. Adjust the
side and rear media guides to fit the media.
3
4
5
Select the correct size in the printer settings. (Software settings can override printer
properties.)
If printing on card stock, access the optimizing feature from the Paper tab in your Windows
printer driver. Then select Optimize for: and choose Card stock from the drop-down list.
Print the document.
Printing on both sides of the media (manual duplexing)
To print on both sides of the media (manual duplexing), you must run the media through the printer
twice. You can print using the normal output path or the straight-through output path.
Hewlett-Packard recommends that you use the normal output path for lightweight paper and use
the straight-through output path for any heavy media or media that curls when printed.
See the following topics for more information:
Note
Manual duplexing is supported only in Windows.
Manual duplexing can cause the product to become dirty, reducing print quality. If the product
EN
Printing custom-sized media or card stock 49
To duplex manually on lightweight media
1
2
Make sure that the straight-through output door is closed.
1
Access the printer properties (for instructions, see Changing
Both Sides, select the Flip Pages Up check box, and click OK.
Print the document.
3
After side one has printed, remove the remaining paper from the
input tray, and set it aside until after you finish your manual
duplexing job.
4
5
Gather the printed pages, keep the printed side down, and
straighten the stack.
3
Remove the priority input tray and place the stack of media back in
the input tray. Side one should be facing down with the top edge
toward the printer. Replace the priority input tray.
6
Click Continue (on screen) and wait for side two to print.
4
5
50 4 Printing
EN
To duplex manually on heavy media or card
stock (straight-through output path)
For heavy media, such as card stock, use the straight-through output
path.
1
2
3
4
5
1
Load the media, and open the straight-through output door on the
back of the product.
2
Sides, select the Straight Paper Path check box, and click OK.
Print the document.
3
4
5
After side one has printed, remove the remaining paper from the
input tray and set it aside until after you finish your manual
duplexing job.
Gather the printed pages, turn the printed side down, and
straighten the stack before placing it back in the input tray. Side one
should be facing down with the top edge toward the printer.
Click Continue (on screen), and wait for side two to print.
EN
Printing on both sides of the media (manual duplexing) 51
Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of media
You can select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you
choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the
sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. You can specify up to nine pages per
sheet of media for Macintosh, or up to 16 for Windows.
To print multiple pages on a single sheet (Windows)
1
2
3
On the Finishing tab under Pages Per Sheet, specify the number of pages per sheet that you
want to print. You can print up to 16 pages per sheet with a Windows OS.
There is also a check box for page borders and a drop-down menu to specify the order of
pages printed on the sheet.
To print multiple pages on a single sheet (Macintosh)
1
2
From the General drop-down list, select Layout.
In the Pages Per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages per sheet to print. You can
print up to nine pages per sheet with a Macintosh OS.
52 4 Printing
EN
Printing booklets
You can print booklets on letter, legal, executive, or A4 paper. This function is available for
Windows users only.
To print booklets
1
Load the paper, and make sure that the straight-through output
door is closed.
1
2
Both Sides, and select Letter (Left Binding) or Letter (Right
Binding) in the Booklet drop-down menu. Print the booklet.
3
4
5
After side one has been printed, remove the remaining paper from
the input tray, and set it aside until your booklet job is complete.
3
Gather the printed pages, keep the printed side down, and
straighten the stack of paper.
Place the printed pages back in the input tray. Side one should be
facing down with the top edge toward the printer.
6
7
Click Continue (on screen), and wait for side two to print.
Fold and staple the pages.
4
5
7
9
8
EN
Printing booklets 53
Printing watermarks
You can use the watermark option to print text “underneath” (in the background) of an existing
document. For example, you might want to have large gray letters reading Draft or Confidential
printed diagonally across the first page or all of the pages of a document.
To access the watermark feature
1
2
On the Effects tab (Windows) or the Watermark/Overlay screen (Macintosh), specify the
type of watermark that you want to print on your document.
54 4 Printing
EN
Starting a copy job
To make copies with your HP LaserJet 3300 series product, use the following instructions:
1
Load your original document onto the flatbed scanner face down (one page at a time) with the
top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
OR
Load your original document face up into the ADF input tray.
2
3
Press start/copy on the product’s control panel to start copying.
Repeat the process for each copy.
For more detailed instructions on loading originals onto the flatbed scanner or into the ADF input
Note
If there are originals loaded in the ADF input tray and on the flatbed scanner, the product
automatically scans from the ADF regardless of whether there is an original on the flatbed scanner.
Canceling a copy job
To cancel a copy job, use one of the following methods:
●
Press cancel on the control panel. If more than one process is running, it clears the process
that currently appears on the display panel.
●
For copies started with the HP LaserJet Copier, click Cancel in the onscreen dialog box.
Note
If you cancel a copy job, clear the original document from the flatbed scanner or from the ADF.
Adjusting copy quality for the current job
The default setting for copy quality is Text. This setting is the best for items that contain mostly
text.
When making a copy of a photo or graphic, you can select the Photosetting to increase the
quality of your copy, or select the BestPhotosetting for the highest photo quality.
If you want to conserve toner, and the copy quality is not that important, select Draft. To change
To adjust the copy quality for the current job
1
2
3
From the control panel, press quality to display the current quality setting for the copy.
Use the < and > buttons to scroll through the quality setting options.
Select a resolution setting and press start/copy to save the selection and immediately start
the copy job, or menu/enter to save the selection without starting the job.
Note
The change in the copy quality setting will remain active for two minutes after the copy job has been
completed.
56 5 Copying
EN
Adjusting the default copy quality
The default setting for copy quality is Text. This setting is the best for items that contain mostly
text. When making a copy of a photo or graphic, you can select Photoor Best Phototo
increase the quality. If you want to conserve toner and the copy quality is not that important, select
To adjust the copy quality
1
2
3
4
5
From the control panel, press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Copy Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Default Quality.
Use the < or > button to scroll through the choices.
Press menu/enter to save the selection.
Adjusting the lighter/darker (contrast) setting for the current job
The lighter/darker setting affects the lightness or darkness (contrast) of the copy. Use the following
procedure to change the contrast for the current copy job only. After the copy has been made, the
contrast setting returns to the default.
Note
To adjust the lighter/darker setting for the current job
1
2
Press lighter/darker to display the current contrast setting.
Use the < or > button to adjust the setting. Move the slider to the left to make the copy lighter
than the original, or move the slider to the right to make the copy darker than the original.
3
Press press start/copy to save the selection and immediately start the copy job, or
menu/enter to save the selection without starting the job.
Adjusting the default lighter/darker (contrast) setting
The default lighter/darker setting affects all copy jobs. To adjust the lighter/darker setting for the
To adjust the default lighter/darker setting
1
2
3
4
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Copy Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Def. Light/Darkand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to adjust the setting. Move the slider to the left to make all copies lighter
than the original, or move the slider to the right to make all copies darker than the original.
5
Press menu/enter to save the selection.
EN
Adjusting the default copy quality 57
Reducing or enlarging copies for the current job
The HP LaserJet 3300 series product can reduce copies to as small as 25% of the original or
enlarge copies to as much as 400% of the original. It can also make the following reductions or
enlargements automatically:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Original: (100%)
Legal to Letter: (78%)
Legal to A4: (83%)
A4 to Letter: Full page (94%)
Letter to A4: Fit to page when copying (97%)
Full Page: (91%)
Fit To Page
2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
Custom: (25-400%)
Note
Note
When using the Fit To Page setting, copy from the flatbed scanner only.
When using the 2 pages per sheet or 4 pages per sheet setting, copy from the ADF only. These
options will not display unless the ADF is installed.
To reduce or enlarge copies for the current job
To reduce or enlarge copies for the current job only, use the following instructions:
1
2
From the control panel, press reduce/enlarge.
Enter the size to which you would like to reduce or enlarge the copies in this job. You can
choose Original=100%, Ltr To A4, A4 To Ltr, Lgl To Ltr, Lgl To A4, Full
Page, Fit to Page, or Custom: 25-400%.
3
4
If you choose Custom 25-400%, enter a percentage using the numeric keypad.
Press press start/copy to save the selection and immediately start the copy job, or
menu/enter to save the selection without starting the job.
Note
You must change the default paper size in the paper input tray to match the output size or part of
Adjusting the default copy size
The default copy size is the size to which copies are normally reduced or enlarged. If you keep the
factory default size set to Original (100%), all copies will be the same size as the original
document.
Note
58 5 Copying
EN
To change the default copy size
1
2
3
4
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Copy Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Def. Redu/Enlrgand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select the option for how you normally want to reduce or enlarge
copies. You can choose Original=100%, Ltr To A4, A4 To Ltr, Lgl To Ltr, Lgl To
A4, Full Page, Fit to Page, or Custom: 25-400%. If you choose Custom, type in the
percentage of the original size that you normally want for copies.
5
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Changing the copy collation setting
You can set the product to automatically collate multiple copies into sets. For example, if you are
making two copies of three pages and automatic collation is on, the pages print in this order:
1,2,3,1,2,3. If automatic collation is off, the pages print in this order: 1,1,2,2,3,3.
To use automatic collation, the original document must fit into memory. If it does not, the product
makes only one copy and displays a message notifying you of the change. If that happens, use
one of the following methods to finish the job:
●
●
●
●
Split the job into smaller jobs containing fewer pages.
Make only one copy of the document at a time.
Turn off automatic collation.
If using the BestPhotoquality setting, try using the Photosetting instead.
The collation setting you choose is in effect for all copies until you change the setting.
The collation setting can also be changed from the product software. For instructions on accessing
To change the copy collation setting for the current job
To change the copy collation setting for the current job, press collation on the control panel.
If the copy collation setting is On, press collation to turn it Offfor the current job. If the copy
collation setting is Off, press collation to turn it Onfor the current job.
To change the default copy collation setting
To change the copy collation default, use the following instructions:
1
2
3
4
5
From the control panel, press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Copy Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Def. Collation.
Use the < and > buttons to select Onor Off.
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory for automatic copy collation is On.
EN
Changing the copy collation setting 59
Changing the number of copies
You can choose to have the default number of copies be any value from 1 to 99.
To change the number of copies for the current job
1
2
From the product’s control panel, press # of copies and use the < and > buttons to inicrement
or decrement the quantity that appears in the control panel display;
OR
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies (between 1 and 99) that you want to
make for your current job.
Press start/copy to begin copying your job.
To change the default number of copies
1
2
3
4
From the control panel, press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Copy Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Def. # of Copiesand press menu/enter.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies (between 1 and 99) that you want as
the default.
5
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory for number of copies is 1.
Using HP LaserJet Copier software
You can use HP LaserJet Copier to perform any of the following tasks when you copy your original:
Print up to 99 copies of the same document
Enable or disable collation
●
●
●
●
●
●
Reduce or enlarge the image
Adjust the contrast
Specify the copy quality
Make color copies by sending to a color printer using HP LaserJet Copy Plus
Note
This functionality is not available in Windows 95.
To access HP LaserJet Copier (Windows or Macintosh)
To access HP LaserJet Copier, use one of the following methods:
●
●
From HP LaserJet Director, click Copy or Copy Plus.
From the Windows task bar, click Start, Programs, HP LaserJet 3300, and HP LaserJet
Copier.
●
From HP LaserJet Document Manager (Windows), click the Copier icon.
OR
From HP Workplace (Macintosh), click the Copy or Copy Plus icon.
60 5 Copying
EN
Note
Note
If you click the Copy Plus icon in addition to the standard copier settings, you can also adjust the
brightness of your copies and send the copy to another printer, including a color printer. For more
For more information on using these features, see the product software Help.
Using HP LaserJet Copy Plus software
You can use HP LaserJet Copy Plus to send a scanned image to any installed Windows printer,
including color printers, enabling you to make color copies. You can also access other advanced
features, such as multiple pages per sheet copying and watermarks.
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus (Windows)
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus, use one of the following methods:
●
From HP LaserJet Director, click Copy Plus.
OR
Click Copy and select, I want to copy to another printer.
●
From the Windows task bar, click Start, Programs, HP LaserJet 3300, and HP LaserJet
Copier. Select I want to copy to another printer.
Note
This functionality is not available in Windows 95.
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus (Macintosh)
1
2
3
4
From the HP LaserJet Director, click Customize.
Click the Customization tab.
Enable Copy Plus by checking the Copy Plus check box.
Click OK.
The HP LaserJet Director will now display a Copy Plus option. This can be used in the same
EN
Using HP LaserJet Copy Plus software 61
Copying photos, two-sided originals, or books
To copy or scan a photo
1
Place the photo on the flatbed scanner with the picture side down and the top left corner of the
photo in the lower right corner of the glass.
2
3
Gently close the lid.
You are now ready to scan or copy the photo using one of the methods described. See
To copy a multiple page stack of 2-sided
originals
1
1
2
3
Load the stack of originals to be copied into the ADF with the first
page up.
Press start/copy. The odd-numbered pages will be copied and
printed.
Remove the stack from the ADF output tray and load the stack with
the last page up and facing forward.
3
4
5
Press start/copy. The even-numbered pages will be printed.
Collate the odd and even-numbered printed copies.
5
62 5 Copying
EN
To copy a book
1
1
Lift the lid and place the book on the flatbed scanner with the
desired book page located in the lower right corner of the glass.
2
3
Gently close the lid.
Gently press down on the lid to press the book to the flatbed
scanner surface.
4
5
Press start/copy, or use one of the other described methods to
copy or scan the book.
2
If your product does not have an ADF, the rear hinge may lift up to
accommodate the book. Gently press down on the center of the lid
to press the book to the flatbed scanner. If the lid comes out, align
the hinge posts to the recesses and reinstall.
3
5
EN
Copying photos, two-sided originals, or books 63
64 5 Copying
EN
Understanding scanning methods
The HP LaserJet 3300 series product offers four ways to scan an item:
●
●
●
Scan from the product: Start scanning directly from the product using the control panel’s
scan buttons. The start scan and scan to buttons can be programmed to scan to a
Scan from the HP LaserJet Director: Use the HP LaserJet Director for one-touch scanning
to specific programmed destinations, such as saving to a file, sending it to e-mail, or
converting it to document files.
Scan from the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer: Use the HP LaserJet Scan Control
Viewer to customize your scan and send it to a selected destination. For more information, see
Viewer are:
• Click Scan from the Document Manager.
• Click Scan from the HP LaserJet Director.
• Select Scanner from the program group in the Start menu.
●
Scan from TWAIN-compliant software: If you are using Microsoft Windows 95 and want to
scan documents, you must use a TWAIN-compliant application. For all other operating
Note
Note
Scan buttons are not available on the 3310 model.
Scanning from the product’s control panel
Note
If you purchased the HP LaserJet 3310 product, scanning from the control panel is not available. To
Use the following instructions to scan directly from your HP LaserJet 3300 series product:
●
●
●
●
●
Note
For the best scan quality, load your originals onto the flatbed scanner.
To scan from the product’s control panel using the start scan
button
To scan from the product’s control panel, use the following instructions. For more detailed
information on loading original documents onto the flatbed scanner or into the ADF input tray, see
66 6 Scanning
EN
1
2
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
To start scanning, press start scan on the product’s control panel.
Note
To scan to a particular destination, you can program the start scan button or use the scan to button
To use the scan to button via USB or parallel connection
To scan to a destination using the scan to button on the product’s control panel, use the following
instructions:
1
2
3
Press scan to on the control panel.
Use the < and > buttons to select a destination.
Press start scan or menu/enter.
To use the scan to button via network connection
To use scan to through a network connection, the Display Name must be configured. The Display
Name is configured as follows:
1
From the HP LaserJet Director, click the Customize button to open the Customize property
sheet.
2
3
Select the Monitor Device tab.
Enter the text that you wish to use to identify your PC in the Display Name edit box (9
characters maximum).
4
5
Click Apply to make the changes and keep the Customize dialog box open, or OK to keep the
changes and return to the HP LaserJet Series Director. New destinations that include this
Display Name will now appear in the device scan to destinations list.
this destination.
To reprogram the scan to button destinations
1
From the HP LaserJet Director, click the Customize button to open the Customize property
sheet.
2
3
Select the Monitor Device tab.
From the Device Scan To Button Settings group box, select the desired destinations, one at a
time, and click the Add button to add to the scan to list.
4
5
6
To edit the device display string or update the e-mail address for a recipient, select the
destination in the scan to list and click the Edit button.
To remove a destination from the scan to list, select the destination and click the Remove
button.
Click Apply to make the changes and keep the Customize dialog box open, or OK to keep the
changes and return to the HP LaserJet Director.
EN
Scanning from the product’s control panel 67
To reprogram the start scan button
To program the start scan button to use a scan to destination, use the following instructions:
1
From the HP LaserJet Director, click the Customize button to open the Customize property
sheet.
2
3
Select the Monitor Device tab.
Choose an action from the drop-down list. The default setting is Open the HP LaserJet
Director.
Canceling a scan job
To cancel a scan job, use one of the following methods:
●
●
Press cancel on the control panel.
Click the cancel button in the onscreen dialog box.
Note
Note
If you cancel a scan job, clear the original document from the flatbed scanner or from the ADF.
These functions vary with Macintosh computers.
Scanning with the product software
You can perform most scanning functions from HP LaserJet Director.
HP LaserJet Director is not supported for Microsoft Windows 95. If you are using Windows 95, see
For more detailed instructions on loading original documents onto the flatbed scanner or into the
To scan using HP LaserJet Director (Windows)
1
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray, with the top of the document
forward, and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2
3
Press start scan on the product’s control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet
Director launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or
the HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows
task bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
To open the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer dialog box, click the Scan button on
HP LaserJet Director.
4
5
Specify a scan destination.
If you want to scan in color, select the Color radio button.
• If there are originals loaded in the ADF input tray and on the flatbed scanner, the product
automatically scans from the ADF regardless of whether there is an original on the flatbed
scanner.
6
Choose the option to scan all pages at once.
68 6 Scanning
EN
Click Scan.
7
8
If there are originals loaded in the ADF, all of the pages are scanned automatically. If the ADF
is empty, one page is scanned from the glass. The entire document is then sent to the
specified destination.
• If you send a scanned document to a file, a printer, or an e-mail application, a secondary
dialog box opens and prompts you for additional information.
To scan using HP LaserJet Director (Macintosh)
1
2
3
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
If the product is connected directly to your computer, the HP LaserJet Director opens after you
insert an item into the ADF input tray.
OR
If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or HP LaserJet Director does not
automatically open, double-click the desktop alias for the HP LaserJet Director.
To open the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer dialog box, click the Scan button in
HP LaserJet Director.
4
5
Specify an image type.
Choose the option to Scan All.
6
After all the pages have completed the scanning process, choose Send To Destination, then
choose Send Now!
OR
Use the Save As icon to save the pages to a disk file.
To use page-by-page scanning (Windows)
1
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2
Press start scan on the product’s control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet
Director launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or
the HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows
task bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
3
4
From the HP LaserJet Director, click Scan to launch the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer.
From the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer, select the option to scan one page at a time and
then click Scan. The first page is scanned and appears in the Preview window.
• If you send a scanned document to a file, a printer, or an e-mail application, a secondary
dialog box appears and prompts you for additional information.
5
6
Specify a destination to send the scan to, and change the settings accordingly.
Use the Viewer modes as necessary by clicking the corresponding button on the toolbar
located in the upper right corner of the Preview window.
EN
Scanning with the product software 69
• Selection mode allows you to specify the area in which to save.
• Edit Region mode allows you to edit the region areas and types.
7
8
Click Accept to save the current image.
If you wish to scan another page, click Yes in the message box that displays. Repeat steps 4
through 7 to scan more pages. Click No in the message box to send the current scan to its
destination.
To use page-by-page scanning (Macintosh)
1
2
3
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
If the product is connected directly to your computer, the HP LaserJet Director opens after you
insert an item into the ADF input tray.
OR
If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or HP LaserJet Director does not
automatically open, double-click the desktop alias for the HP LaserJet Director.
To open the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer dialog box, click the Scan button on
HP LaserJet Director.
4
5
6
7
8
Specify an image type.
Choose To Scan.
After the scan process has finished, choose Scan another page.
Repeat step 6 for each page of the document.
After all the pages have completed the scanning process, choose Send To Destination, then
choose Send Now!
OR
Use the Save As icon to save the pages to a disk file.
Scanning with TWAIN-compliant software
Note
If you are using Windows 95 and want to scan documents, you will have to use a TWAIN-compliant
application. For all other operating systems, you may use a TWAIN-compliant application or the
product software.
The HP LaserJet 3300 series product is TWAIN-compliant and works with Windows- and
Macintosh-based programs that support TWAIN-compliant scanning devices. While in a
TWAIN-enabled program, you can access the scanning feature and scan an image directly into the
open application. To do so, follow the program’s instructions for acquiring an image using TWAIN.
For more specific information, see the product software Help.
Note
The Macintosh product software is TWAIN version 1.9 compliant.
To use flatbed scanner preview scan
Use this procedure to preview the scanned image when you are using the TWAIN interface in
Windows.
70 6 Scanning
EN
1
2
In the scan (or TWAIN) software, click the preview button. The scanner will scan the image
and then display it in the preview screen.
If you want to save only part of the image, select the area that you want to save. The selected
area will be saved to the preset scan destination.
Archiving scanned text or images
HP software provides direct access to your file management system, which means you can quickly
store scanned images in any directory you choose. You can use HP LaserJet Director or
HP LaserJet Document Manager to store scanned images.
To archive a scanned image
1
2
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray, with the top of the document
forward, and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
Press start scan on the product’s control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet
Director launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or
the HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows
task bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
3
4
In the HP LaserJet Director, click Archive. If the HP LaserJet Director does not display an
Archive option, use the Customize option in the HP LaserJet Director to activate the Archive
feature.
The document is scanned and stored in the destination specified by the user in the Save As
dialog.
To use the archive feature (Macintosh)
1
2
3
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
If the product is connected directly to your computer, the HP LaserJet Director opens after you
insert an item into the ADF input tray.
OR
If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or HP LaserJet Director does not
automatically open, double-click the desktop alias for the HP LaserJet Director.
In the HP LaserJet Director, click Archive. If the HP LaserJet Director does not display an
Archive option, use the Customize option in the HP LaserJet Director to activate the Archive
feature.
4
5
6
The paper document is scanned, and the created document is opened in the HP Workplace.
If necessary, you can crop the image or add annotations.
Select File. Then select Save to save the document to disk.
EN
Archiving scanned text or images 71
Scanning with OCR
To edit scanned text (Windows and Macintosh)
You can use the OCR software to import scanned text into your preferred word processing
application for editing. This allows you to edit faxes, letters, newspaper clippings, and many other
documents. The HP LaserJet Director allows you to specify the word processing application you
want to use for editing.
Note
OCR cannot recognize handwritten text.
To change the OCR word processing application
You can change the default word processing program that is used for OCR.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Open the HP LaserJet Director.
Click the Customize button.
Select the Button Customization tab.
Select OCR, then click the Options button.
Select the desired word processing application from the Select Application drop-down list.
Click Next and select the application’s icon if it is not already selected.
Click Finish.
Click Apply or OK to save your selection.
Note
Due to the complexity of some word processing applications and their interaction with the product,
it is sometimes preferable to scan to Wordpad (a Windows accessory) and then cut and paste the
text into your preferred word processing application.
To use HP LaserJet Director’s OCR feature
1
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray, with the top of the document
forward, and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
2
Press start scan on the product’s control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet
Director launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or
the HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows
task bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
3
4
In HP LaserJet Director, click OCR.
The original is scanned, and your word processing software application launches
automatically.
5
The scanned text has been optically recognized and is now ready to edit using your word
processing application.
72 6 Scanning
EN
Note
Note
If the word processing icon is not present or active, either you do not have a word processing software
application installed on your computer or the scanner software did not recognize the application
during the installation. For instructions on how to create a link to your word processing application,
The OCR software does not support scanning colored text. Colored text will always be converted to
black and white text before being sent to OCR; thus, all text in the final document will be black and
white regardless of the original color.
EN
Scanning with OCR 73
Enhancing images with HP LaserJet Document Manager or HP Photo
Center
You can use HP LaserJet Document Manager or HP Photo Center to make the following
enhancements to scanned images:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Contrast
Brightness
Color adjustment
Crop
Effects
Invert
Red-eye removal
Rotate and flip
Sharpen
Straighten
Note
If you are using the Macintosh product software, these features are found in the HP Workplace.
However, not all of the features listed above are supported by the Macintosh software.
To access image enhancement features (Windows)
●
From HP LaserJet Document Manager, open a document and select an image enhancement
feature from the Image menu.
●
For the Photo Center, first open a document then turn on Advanced menus from the View
menu in order to display the Image menu.
Note
For instructions on using HP LaserJet Document Manager’s image enhancement features, see the
product software Help.
Adding annotations to HP documents
You can use HP software to modify and annotate scanned documents that are saved as
HP documents (.hpd extension). You can add any of the following elements to an HP document:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Text
Electronic sticky notes
Highlights (to text or graphics)
Rubber stamp (for example, Confidential)
Lines and arrows
Hyperlinks
Note
For complete instructions on using HP LaserJet Document Manager’s annotation features, see the
product software Help.
74 6 Scanning
EN
To access HP LaserJet Document Manager’s annotation features
Note
These instructions apply to Windows users only.
1
2
If it is not open, open the document to be annotated in the HP LaserJet Document Manager.
Select an annotation tool from the Annotation menu.
To change the annotation settings
To change the annotations settings, open the Annotations menu and select Annotation
Properties.
Adding annotations to scanned image files
You can add annotations to .bmp, .tif, .jpg, and .gif files using the HP LaserJet Photo Center.
You can add the following annotation elements:
●
●
●
Freehand drawing items
Lines, rectangles, ovals, and polygons (filled or outlined)
Text
To add annotations to an image file, select the Tools menu in the HP LaserJet Photo Center.
Sending scanned items as e-mail attachments
You can use either HP LaserJet Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager to scan to e-mail. Not
all e-mail applications are supported.
Note
Note
Scan to e-mail features are not supported in Windows 95.
To scan to e-mail (Windows)
If there are originals loaded in the ADF input tray and on the flatbed scanner, the product
automatically scans from the ADF regardless of whether there is an original on the flatbed scanner.
1
2
Open the HP LaserJet Director.
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
3
Press start scan on the control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet Director
launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or the
HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows task
bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
4
5
In HP LaserJet Director, click E-mail.
The original is scanned, and your computer e-mail software application launches and
automatically attaches the scanned image file to a new message. Enter an e-mail address and
click Send.
EN
Adding annotations to scanned image files 75
To scan to e-mail (Macintosh)
1
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2
Open the HP LaserJet Director by double-clicking the HP LaserJet Director alias that appears
on the desktop.
3
4
Click the E-mail button.
When an e-mail appears with the scanned item attached, enter an e-mail address and click
Send.
To e-mail scanned files in an alternative mode
You can use an alternative mode to send a document in e-mail in any of the following situations:
●
●
●
You do not have a compatible e-mail program.
The E-mail button does not appear on the HP LaserJet Director.
You do not have access to the HP LaserJet Director.
1
Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2
Use the HP LaserJet Director or other software to scan the document to the desktop or HP
LaserJet Scan Control Viewer.
3
4
Save the file in the format you want.
Open your e-mail program, attach the file as you normally would, enter an address, and click
Send.
Scanner resolution and color
If you are printing a scanned image or copying an image and the quality is not as you expected,
you might have selected a resolution or color setting in the copier/scanner software that does not
match your needs. Resolution and color affect scanned and copied images in the following ways:
●
●
●
●
Image clarity
Texture of gradations (smooth or rough)
Scan and copy time
File size
Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi) while color, grayscale, and black and white define the
number of colors possible. You can adjust the scanner hardware resolution up to 600 dpi. The
software has the ability to perform an interpolated resolution up to 9600 dpi. You can set color and
grayscale at 1 bit (black and white) or 8 bit (256 levels of gray) to 24 bit (true color).
The resolution and color guidelines table lists simple tips that you can follow to meet your scanning
and copying needs.
76 6 Scanning
EN
Note
Note
Setting the resolution and color to a high value can create large files that take up disk space and
slow the scanning or copying process. It is important that you first determine how you are going to
use the scanned image.
Color and grayscale images achieve the best resolution when scanned from the flatbed scanner
rather than the ADF.
Resolution and color guidelines
Intended use
Fax
Recommended resolution
Recommended color settings
150 dpi
150 dpi
●
Black and White
E-mail
●
●
●
Black and White if the image does not
require smooth gradation
Grayscale if the image requires smooth
gradation
Color if the image is in color
Edit text
300 dpi
●
Black and White
Print (graphics or text) 600 dpi for text and complex graphics ● Black and White for text and line art
●
Grayscale for shaded or colored
graphics and photos
150 to 300 dpi for simple graphics
and photos
●
Color if the image is in color
Display on screen
75 dpi
●
●
●
Black and White for text
Grayscale for graphics and photos
Color if the image is in color
EN
Scanner resolution and color 77
Color
You can set the color values to the following settings when copying or scanning.
Setting
Recommended use
Where to set the color value
Color
High quality color photos or documents in
which the color is important.
Windows scanner software
Black and White
Grayscale
Use for text documents.
Windows scanner software
Use this setting when file size is an issue or Windows scanner software
when you want a document or photograph
scanned quickly.
Photo Only
Documents that contain mostly color and
black and white photos.
Windows or Macintosh TWAIN driver
Text Only
Documents that contain mostly text.
Windows or Macintosh TWAIN driver
Windows or Macintosh TWAIN driver
Mixed Color
Documents that contain mostly color
graphics.
Mixed Grayscale
Documents that contain mostly black and
white graphics.
Windows or Macintosh TWAIN driver
Photo
Typical photo quality.
Copier software
Copier software
Copier software
Text
Documents that contain mostly text.
Best Photo
Documents that contain mostly color and
black and white photos.
Best photo quality.
Draft
To save toner when copying documents.
Copier software
78 6 Scanning
EN
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Setting the information in the fax header
To set the fax header
To set or change the fax header information, use the following steps. If you need help entering any
1
2
3
4
5
On the control panel, press menu/enter.
Using the < and > buttons, select Time/Date, Headerand press menu/enter.
Using the < and > buttons, select Fax Header, and press menu/enter.
Using the alphanumeric keypad, enter your fax number and press menu/enter.
Using the alphanumeric keypad, add the name of your company and press menu/enter.
Setting the answer mode
Depending on your situation, you can set the HP LaserJet 3330’s answer mode to automatic or
manual.
●
●
Automatic: In automatic answer mode, the product answers incoming calls after a specified
number of rings or upon recognition of special fax tones. To specify the number of rings, see
Manual: In manual answer mode, the product never answers calls. You must start the
fax-receiving process yourself, either by pressing start fax on the control panel or by picking
up a phone connected to that line and dialing 1-2-3.
The default answer mode is automatic.
Note
Although most users leave the answer mode set to automatic, voice callers who dial the fax phone
number will hear fax tones if the phone is not answered, or if they do not hang up by the specified
number of rings-to-answer. If you do not want voice callers to hear fax tones, use the manual setting,
but remember that fax calls are not received automatically.
To set the answer mode
To set or change the answer mode, use the following steps:
1
On the control panel, press menu/enter.
80 7 Faxing
EN
2
3
4
5
6
Using the < and > buttons, select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Using the < and > buttons, select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Answer Mode.
Using the < and > buttons, select Automaticor Manualand press menu/enter.
The control panel display shows the answer mode setting that you specified.
Loading originals to fax
Use the instructions below to load original documents for faxing.
To load fax documents into the ADF input tray
1
Before loading the fax documents into the ADF input tray, check to make sure there is nothing
on the flatbed scanner.
2
Put the top ends of the document to be faxed print side up in the ADF input tray with the first
page to be scanned at the top of the stack.
3
4
Push the document up against the side of the ADF input tray.
Slide the document into the ADF input tray until it does not move any farther.
The document is now ready to be faxed.
Sending faxes
To send a fax to one recipient
Note
If you want to improve the quality of a paper document before faxing it, scan the document, straighten
or clean the image, and send it as a fax from the software. For more information, see the product
software Help.
1
Dial the fax number using one of the following methods:
• Use the alphanumeric buttons on the product’s control panel.
• If the fax number you are calling has been assigned to a one-touch key, press that key.
• If the fax number you are calling has a speed-dial code, press speed dial, enter the
speed-dial code using the alphanumeric buttons, and press menu/enter.
Note
When dialing with the alphanumeric buttons, include any pauses or other needed numbers, such as
an area code, an access code fornumbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9 or0), or a long-distance
2
3
Load the document into the ADF input tray.
Press fax/send.
When the last page of the fax has exited the product, you can start sending another fax, copying,
or scanning.
electronic phone books available, you may be able to use them for selecting recipients. Electronic
phone books are generated with third-party applications.
EN
Loading originals to fax 81
To send a fax to multiple recipients
You can send a fax to several fax numbers at once. If you want to send a fax to a group of fax
In the rare instance that your document does not fit into memory, you will need to send the
document to each fax number one at a time or use HP LaserJet Director.
Note
HP LaserJet Director is not supported for Microsoft Windows 95.
To send a fax using a group-dial code
1
2
3
Load the document into the ADF input tray.
Adjust any fax settings, such as contrast or resolution.
Press the one-touch key for the group.
OR
Press phone book, press the group-dial code assigned to the group, and press menu/enter.
4
Press fax/send.
The product scans the document into memory and sends the fax to each number specified. If a
number in the group is busy or does not answer, the product will redial the number based on its
redial setting. After multiple redial attempts fail, the product updates the Fax Activity Log with the
error and proceeds to the next number in the group.
Note
The Fax Activity Log feature is not supported in the software for Microsoft Windows 95, but you can
print the Fax Activity Log using the control panel. For instructions, see Printing the fax activity log.
To send a fax to an ad hoc group
Use the following instructions to send a fax to a group of recipients that does not have an assigned
group-dial code:
1
2
Load the document into the ADF input tray or the flatbed scanner.
Dial the first fax number using one of the following methods:
• Use the alphanumeric buttons.
• If the fax number you are calling has a one-touch key, press that key.
• If the fax number you are calling has a speed-dial code, press phone book, enter the
speed-dial code using the alphanumeric buttons, and press menu/enter.
Note
When dialing using the alphanumeric buttons, include any pauses or other needed numbers, such
as an area code, an access code for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9), or a long distance
3
4
Press menu/enter.
To continue entering numbers, repeat steps 2 and 3.
OR
If you are finished entering numbers, go to the next step.
5
Press fax/send.
82 7 Faxing
EN
6
The product sends the fax to each fax number. If a number in the group is busy or does not
answer, the product will redial that number based on its redial setting. If multiple redial
attempts fail, the product updates the Fax Activity Log with the error and then proceeds to the
next number in the group.
Note
The Fax Activity Log feature is not supported in the software for Microsoft Windows 95, but you can
print the Fax Activity Log using the control panel. For instructions, see Printing the fax activity log.
Canceling a fax job
Use these instructions to cancel a single fax currently dialing or a fax that is being transmitted or
received.
To cancel the current fax job
Press cancel on the control panel. Any pages that have not been transmitted are canceled.
To cancel a fax job using fax job status
Use this procedure to cancel a fax job in the following situations:
●
●
●
The product is waiting to redial after a busy signal or no answer.
The fax is going to a group of numbers.
The fax is scheduled to be sent at a future time.
Use the following steps to cancel a fax job using fax job status:
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Fax Job Status.
Use the < or > button to scroll through pending jobs until you reach the job you want to clear.
Press menu/enter to select the job you want to cancel.
Press menu/enter to confirm that you want the job to be canceled.
Using manual dial
Normally, the product dials after you press fax/send. At times, however, you might want the
product to dial each number as you press it. For example, if you are charging your fax call to a
calling card, you may need to dial the fax number, wait for the acceptance tone of your telephone
company, and then dial the calling card number. When dialing internationally, you might need to
dial part of the number and then listen for dial tones before continuing to dial.
To use manual dial
1
2
3
Load the document into the ADF input tray.
Press fax/send.
Begin dialing. The fax number dials as you press each digit. This allows you to wait for pauses,
dial tones, international access tones, or calling card acceptance tones before continuing to
dial.
EN
Canceling a fax job 83
Deleting faxes from memory
Use this procedure only if you are concerned someone else has access to your product and will
try to reprint faxes from memory.
CAUTION
In addition to clearing the reprint memory, this procedure clears any fax currently being sent, unsent
faxes pending redial, faxes scheduled to be sent at a future time, and faxes not printed or forwarded.
To delete faxes from memory
1
2
3
4
Press menu/enter.
Press > once to display Fax Functionsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Clear Saved Faxsand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
Redialing manually
If you want to send another document to the last fax number dialed, use the following procedure to
manually redial. If you are trying to resend the same document you sent the first time, you will
want to wait until the automatic redials have stopped or you have stopped them yourself.
Otherwise, the recipient might get the fax twice: once from the manual redial attempt and once
from one of the automatic redial attempts.
Note
To stop the current redial attempt for a fax, or to cancel all pending, automatic redial attempts for a
To redial manually
1
2
3
Load the document into the ADF input tray.
Press redial/pause.
Press fax/send. The product redials the last number dialed and attempts to send the fax.
Sending a fax at a future time
You can schedule a fax to be sent automatically at a future time to one or more people. When you
complete this procedure, the product scans the document into memory and returns to the Ready
state so you can do other tasks.
Note
Note
This feature is not supported for Microsoft Windows 95.
If the product cannot transmit the fax at the scheduled time, it is indicated on the fax call report (if
that option is turned on), or logged in the fax activity log. This can happen in the case of no answer,
or if a busy signal results in the failure of redial attempts. (See Setting fax call report print times and
If you have set a fax to send at a future time but need to add something to it, you can send the
additional information as another job. All faxes scheduled to go to the same fax number on the
same date and time are delivered as individual faxes.
84 7 Faxing
EN
To send a fax at a future time
1
2
3
4
5
Load the document into the ADF input tray.
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to display Fax Functionsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to display Send Fax Laterand press menu/enter.
Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the start time. If you are set to a 12-hour clock, use the
> button to move the cursor past the fourth character to set A.M. or P.M. Select 1for A.M. or
select 2for P.M., and press menu/enter.
OR
If you are set to a 24-hour clock, press menu/enter.
6
7
Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the date and press menu/enter.
OR
Accept the default date by pressing menu/enter.
Type the fax number, enter the speed-dial code, or press the one-touch key. (This feature does
not support ad hoc groups.) Press menu/enter or fax/send. The product scans the document
into memory and sends it at the designated time.
Receiving faxes
You can receive faxes to the product or to your computer. In general, incoming faxes to the product
are automatically answered; however, if you change which devices are connected to the same
phone line that the product is connected to, you will need to change how the product answers
the procedures in this section to manage faxes routed to the product.
●
●
●
To receive faxes when you hear fax tones
If you have a phone line that receives both fax and phone calls, and you hear fax tones when you
answer the phone, you can start the receiving process in one of two ways:
●
●
If you are close to the product, press fax/send on the control panel.
When you answer any phone connected to the line (an extension phone) and hear fax tones,
the product should begin answering the call automatically. If not, press 1-2-3 in sequence on
the telephone keypad, listen for fax transmission sounds, and then hang up.
Note
To reprint a fax
If you want to reprint a fax because the print cartridge was empty or if the fax printed on the wrong
type of media, you can try to reprint it. The actual number of faxes stored for possible reprinting is
determined by the available memory. The most recent fax prints first; the oldest fax prints last.
These faxes are continuously stored, and reprinting them does not clear them from memory. To
EN
Receiving faxes 85
Note
You do not need to use this procedure if the fax does not print because of a jam or because the
media runs out. During these situations, faxes are received to memory. As soon as you clear the
jam or refill the media, faxes automatically resume printing.
Use the following steps to reprint a fax:
1
2
3
Press menu/enter.
Press > once to display Fax Functionsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to display Reprint Lastand press menu/enter. The product begins
reprinting the most recently printed fax.
Note
To stop the printing at any time, press cancel.
To block or unblock fax numbers
If there are people or businesses from whom you do not want to receive faxes, you can block up to
30 fax numbers using the control panel. When you block a fax number and someone from that
number sends you a fax, the display panel indicates the number is blocked, the fax does not print,
and the fax is not saved in memory. Faxes from blocked fax numbers appear in the fax activity log
with a “discarded” designation. You can unblock blocked fax numbers individually or all at one time.
Note
Note
The fax activity log feature is not supported for Microsoft Windows 95, but you can print the fax
Use the following steps to block or unblock fax numbers using the control panel:
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Settingsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Block Faxesand press menu/enter.
Do one of the following:
• To block a fax number, use the < or > button to select Add Entryand press menu/enter.
Enter the fax number exactly as it appears in the header (including spaces) and press
menu/enter. Enter a name for the blocked number and press menu/enter.
• To unblock a single fax number, use the < or > button to select Delete Entryand press
menu/enter. Use the < or > button to select the fax number you want and press
menu/enter to confirm the deletions.
• To unblock all blocked fax numbers, use the < or > button to select Clear Alland press
menu/enter. Press menu/enter again to confirm the deletions.
Receiving faxes to your computer
To receive faxes to your computer, you must enable the receive to PC setting in the software (see
the product software Help). If you have a phone line receiving both fax and voice calls (a shared
line) and an answering machine or computer voicemail on the line, you must turn off the answering
machine or voicemail to receive faxes to the computer. If you do not, either the answering system
answers all calls, or the PC fax program does. Because of this limitation, most users choose to
receive faxes to the product.
86 7 Faxing
EN
The receive to PC setting can only be activated from the computer. If for any reason that computer
is no longer available or accessible, you can use the procedure below to turn the receive to PC
setting off from the product control panel.
To turn the receive to PC setting off from the control panel
1
2
3
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Functionsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Stop Recv To PCand press menu/enter to confirm your
selection.
4
Once the Stop Recv to PCsetting has been selected, any faxes still in the product’s
memory are printed.
Note
You cannot use the receive to PC feature if the product is networked, or if you are using the Macintosh
software.
About speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes
You can store frequently dialed fax numbers or groups of fax numbers as one-touch keys,
speed-dial codes, or group-dial codes.
In the product’s phone book, there are a total of 275 codes available that can be used for
speed-dial codes and group-dial codes. For example, if you program 225 of the codes as
speed-dials, the remaining 50 can be used for group-dials.
See the following procedures for more information about how to use speed-dial codes, one-touch
keys, and group-dial codes:
To program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys
Speed-dial codes 1 through 9 are also associated with their corresponding one-touch keys on the
control panel. The one-touch keys can be used for speed-dial or group-dial codes. A maximum of
50 characters can be entered for a single fax number.
Note
Speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes are more easily programmed from the
software. For instructions on programming speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes
using the product software, see the product software Help.
Use the following steps to program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys from the product’s
control panel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
Press menu/enter to select Individual Setup.
Press menu/enter to select Add.
Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the speed-dial code number you want to associate with
this fax number, and press menu/enter. Choosing a number from 1 to 9 also associates the
fax number with the corresponding one-touch key.
EN
About speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes 87
Note
When entering a fax number, you can use a comma (,) for a pause, or the letter R if you want the
product to wait for a dial tone.
7
Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the fax number. Include any pauses or other needed
numbers, such as an area code, an access code for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a
9 or 0), or a long distance prefix.
8
9
Press menu/enter.
Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter a name for the fax number. To do so, repeatedly press
the alphanumeric button for the letter you need until the letter appears. (For a list of
Note
To insert punctuation, press the asterisk (*) repeatedly until the character you want appears and
press > to go to the next space.
10 Press menu/enter to save the information.
11 If you have more speed-dial codes or one-touch keys to program, repeat steps 1 through 10.
To delete speed-dial codes and one-touch keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
Press menu/enter to select Individual Setup.
Use the < or > button to select Deleteand press menu/enter.
Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the number of the speed-dial code you want to delete
and press menu/enter.
7
Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
To quickly program speed-dial codes or one-touch keys
Note
The following procedure cannot be used to program a group-dial code. For group-dial code
Use the following method to program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys easily from the product
control panel:
1
On the product control panel, press phone book, enter an unprogrammed speed-dial code
and press menu/enter.
OR
Press an unprogrammed one-touch key. The control panel display will notify you that the
speed-dial code or one-touch key has not been programmed.
2
3
Press menu/enter to program the speed-dial code or one-touch key.
Enter the fax number and press menu/enter. Include pauses, or other needed numbers, such
as an area code, an access code for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9 or 0), or a
Note
When entering a fax number you can use a comma (,) for a pause, or the letter R if you want the
product to wait for a dial tone.
88 7 Faxing
EN
4
5
Enter a name for the fax number. To do so, repeatedly press the numeric button for the letter
Press menu/enter to save the information.
To program a one-touch key for alternate long distance
If you use an alternate long distance carrier, you can program a one-touch key to dial the service’s
access number before a fax number. When you need to use this one-touch key, press it, enter the
fax number, and press fax/send. Both the access number and the fax number are then dialed
together. If the access number is used almost every time you dial a fax, it might be easier to
Note
Speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes are more easily programmed from the
software (not available in Windows 95). For instructions on programming speed-dial codes,
one-touch keys, and group-dial codes using the product software, see the product software Help.
Use this procedure if the access number has more than 10 characters or if you only occasionally
use the access number.
1
the fax number, you might also have to do one or both of the following tasks:
• If you have to wait for an access tone at some point in the number, enter one or more
three-second pauses by pressing pause/redial.
• Enter a personal identification number (PIN), if applicable.
2
3
When you are finished entering the access number, press pause/redial. A pause at the end of
the string tells the product not to dial this number until you dial the fax number.
Managing group-dial codes
If you send information to the same group of people on a regular basis, you can program a
group-dial code to simplify the task. Any available speed-dial codes can be programmed with
group-dial codes. Group-dial codes using numbers 1 through 9 are also associated with the
corresponding one-touch key on the control panel. Any individual can be added to a group. All
group members must have programmed speed-dial codes or one-touch keys assigned to them
before being added to the group-dial code.
Use these instructions to manage your group-dial codes:
Note
Speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes are more easily programmed from the
software (not available in Windows 95). For instructions on programming speed-dial codes,
one-touch keys, and group-dial codes using the product software see the product software Help.
To program group-dial codes
1
Assign a speed-dial code to each fax number you want in the group. (For instructions, see To
2
Press menu/enter.
EN
Managing group-dial codes 89
3
4
5
6
7
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
Use the < or > button to select Group Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Add Groupand press menu/enter.
Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the number you want to associate with this group and
press menu/enter. Choosing 1 through 9 also associates the group with the corresponding
one-touch key.
8
9
instructions on using the buttons. After the name of the group has been entered, press
menu/enter.
Press the one-touch key or choose the speed-dial code for the group member you want to add
and press menu/enter. Press menu/enter again to confirm the addition. Repeat this step for
each group member you want to add.
10 When you are finished, press cancel.
11 If you have more group-dial codes to enter, press menu/enter and repeat steps 1 through 10.
To delete group-dial codes
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
Use the < or > button to select Group Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Delete Groupand press menu/enter.
Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the number of the group-dial code you want to delete
and press menu/enter.
7
Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
To delete an individual from a group-dial code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
Use the < or > button to select Group Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Del. # in Groupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select the individual you want to delete from the group.
Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to delete other individuals from the group.
OR
Press cancel if you are finished.
90 7 Faxing
EN
Deleting all phone book entries
You can delete all speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes that are programmed in
the product.
CAUTION
Once speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dialcodes are deleted, they cannot be recovered.
To delete all phone book entries
Use the following instructions to delete all speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes
that are programmed in your product:
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
Use the < or > button to select Delete Alland press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
Using dialing characters
When using the control panel to enter your name in the header or type a name for a one-touch key,
speed-dial code, or group-dial code, press the appropriate numeric button repeatedly until the
letter you need appears. Then, press > to select that letter and move to the next space.
Dialing character table
This table shows which letters and numbers appear on each numeric button when the default
language is set to English.
Button number
Characters
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ABCabc
DEFdef
GHIghi
JKLjkl
MNOmno
PQRSpqrs
EN
Deleting all phone book entries 91
8
9
0
*
TUVtuv
WXYZwxyz
0
( ) + - . / , “ *&@
space #
#
To insert a pause or wait
You can insert pauses into a fax number you are dialing or programming to a one-touch key,
speed-dial code, or group-dial code. Pauses are often needed when dialing internationally or
connecting to an outside line.
Press pause/redial to insert a three-second pause in your dialing sequence (models sold in
France insert a two-second pause). A comma appears on the control panel display, indicating the
pause will occur at that point in the dialing sequence.
Inserting a dial prefix
A dial prefix is a number or group of numbers automatically added to the beginning of every fax
number you enter at the control panel or from the software.
By default, this setting is off. You may want to turn this setting on and enter a prefix if, for example,
you have to dial a number such as 9 to get a phone line outside your company’s phone system.
While this setting is on, you can still dial a fax number without the dial prefix by using manual dial.
To set the dial prefix
Use the following instructions to set the dial prefix:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Press > once to select Fax Send Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Dial Prefixand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Onor Offand press menu/enter.
If you choose On, use the numeric buttons to enter the prefix and press menu/enter. You can
use numbers, pauses, and dialing symbols.
92 7 Faxing
EN
Using fax forwarding
You can set your product to forward incoming faxes to another fax number. When the fax arrives at
your product, it is stored in memory. Then your product dials the fax number you have specified
and sends the fax. If it cannot forward a fax because of an error (for example, the number is busy)
and repeated attempts to redial are unsuccessful, your product will print the fax.
If the product runs out of memory while receiving a fax, it will terminate the incoming fax and only
forward the pages and partial pages already stored in memory.
When using this feature, the product must be the one receiving faxes (not the computer) and the
To use fax forwarding
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Forward Faxand press menu/enter.
Press > to select Onor Offand press menu/enter.
If you choose to turn fax forwarding on, use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the fax number
where you want the fax to go, and press menu/enter to save your selection.
Using fax polling
If someone else has set up a fax to be polled, you can request that the fax be sent to your product
(this is known as polling another machine).
To poll (request a fax from) another fax machine
1
2
3
4
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Functionsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Polling Receiveand press menu/enter.
Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the number of the fax machine that you want to request
the fax from and press menu/enter.
5
Your product dials the other fax machine and requests the fax.
Enabling an extension phone
With this setting turned on, you can alert the product to pick up the incoming fax call by pressing
1-2-3 sequentially on the telephone keypad. The default is Yes. Turn this setting off only if you have
a service from your telephone company that also uses the 1-2-3 sequence. The service will not
work if it conflicts with the product.
To enable an extension phone
Use the following instructions to enable an extension phone:
1
Press menu/enter.
EN
Using fax forwarding 93
2
3
4
5
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Extension Phoneand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Onor Offand press menu/enter to save your selection.
Sending a fax by dialing from a telephone
At times, you might want to dial a fax number from a telephone connected to the same line as the
product. For example, if you are sending a fax to a person whose product is in manual receive
mode, you can call first to let that person know the fax is coming.
To send a fax by dialing from a telephone
1
2
Load the document into the ADF input tray.
Pick up the handset of a phone connected to the same line as the product and dial the fax
number using either the phone’s or the product’s numeric buttons.
3
4
When the recipient answers, instruct the recipient to start the fax machine.
When you hear the fax tones, press fax/send to begin transmitting the fax, wait until the
display reads Connecting, and hang up the phone.
Changing the HP LaserJet 3330 product’s volume settings
You can control the volume of the following fax sounds from the product’s control panel:
●
●
The fax sounds associated with incoming and outgoing faxes
The ring for incoming faxes
To change the fax sounds (line monitor) volume
1
2
3
Press volume on the control panel.
Use the < and > buttons to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory is Soft.
To change the ring volume
The ring is heard when the device is initially sending or receiving a call. The ring duration length is
based on the local telecom ring pattern length.
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Common Settingsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Volume Settingsand press menu/enter.
Press the > button once to select Ring Volumeand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
94 7 Faxing
EN
6
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory for ring volume is Soft.
Changing the default resolution
Resolution affects the quality, in dots per inch, of documents to be faxed. It also affects the
transmission speed.
Use this procedure to change the default resolution for all fax jobs.
To change the default resolution
1
2
3
Press resolution to display the current resolution setting.
Use the < and > buttons to display the desired resolution setting.
Press menu/enter to save the selection.
Changing the default contrast
To change the default contrast
The default contrast is the contrast normally applied to items being faxed. The slider is set to the
middle as the default contrast setting.
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Send Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Def. Light/Dark.
Use the < button to move the slider to the left to make the fax lighter than the original, or use
the > button to move the slider to the right to make the fax darker than the original.
6
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Changing the detect dial tone setting
Normally the product waits for a dial tone before attempting to a dial a fax number. If you are using
the product on the same line as your phone, turn on the detect dial tone setting. This will prevent
the product from sending a fax while someone is on the phone.
To change detect dial tone
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Press > once to select Fax Send Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Detect Dial Toneand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Onor Offand press menu/enter.
EN
Changing the default resolution 95
Note
The default set at the factory for detect dial tone is Onfor France and Hungary, and Offfor all other
countries/regions.
Changing how the product answers incoming faxes
The product’s answer mode is set when you set up the product. You only need to change these
settings if you change the devices connected to this phone line.
To set the answer mode to automatic or manual
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Answer Mode.
Use the < and > buttons to select Automaticor Manualand press menu/enter to save your
selection.
Changing rings-to-answer
When the answer mode is set to automatic, the product’s rings-to-answer setting determines the
number of times the phone rings before an incoming call is answered.
If the product is connected to a line receiving both fax and voice calls (a shared line) with an
answering machine, you may need to adjust the rings-to-answer. The number of rings-to-answer
for the product must be greater than the rings-to-answer on the answering machine. This allows
the answering machine to answer the incoming call and record a message if it is a voice call.
When the answering machine answers the call, the product listens to the call and automatically
answers it if it detects fax tones.
Refer to the fax guide that came with your product to determine the default and recommended
rings-to-answer settings for your country or region.
To set the number of rings-to-answer
To set or change the number of rings-to-answer, use the following steps:
1
2
3
4
5
On the control panel, press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Rings To Answerand press menu/enter.
Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the number of rings-to-answer and press menu/enter.
Note
If you have an answering machine or computer voicemail connected to this line for the other phone
number (on the single ring pattern), make sure the product’s rings-to-answer is set to a lower number
than the rings-to-answer on the answering machine or voicemail. If it is not, the product will be unable
to receive fax calls.
96 7 Faxing
EN
Changing answer ring patterns
If you subscribe to ring pattern service with your telephone company, you can enable the product
to detect ring patterns. If you do not have ring pattern service, and you change this setting, the
product will not be able to receive faxes.
What is ring pattern service?
Ring pattern service, such as distinctive ring, is available from some local telephone companies. It
allows you to have two or three phone numbers on one line. This costs less than paying for two or
three separate lines. Each of the phone numbers has a different ring pattern. Ring patterns allow
you to answer voice calls and allow the product to answer fax calls.
How do I get the service?
Call your local telephone company to check the availability and to subscribe. The service might not
be available in all areas. Also, your telephone company might use a different name for this service.
If ring pattern service is available and you choose to subscribe to it, remember the following:
●
●
Determine which ring pattern is used for phone calls and which is used for fax calls.
Make sure the telephone company assigns the correct ring pattern to the fax number. The
product ignores other ring patterns.
How will I know if it is working?
After product installation is complete, ask someone you know to send you a fax. Make sure you
provide the correct fax number.
To change answer ring patterns
Note
Do not change the all rings default setting if you do not have ring pattern service from your telephone
company. If you do not have ring pattern service and you change this setting, the product might not
be able to receive faxes.
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Answer Ring Typeand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select the ring pattern you want the product to use when answering
incoming fax calls and press menu/enter to save your selection.
Changing the silence-detect mode
This setting controls whether or not you can receive faxes from older-model fax machines that do
not emit a fax signal during fax transmissions. At the time of this publication, these silent-model fax
machines represented very few of the fax machines in use. The default setting is Off. It should be
changed only if you regularly receive faxes from someone with an older-model fax machine.
EN
Changing answer ring patterns 97
To change the silence detect mode
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Silence Detectand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Onor Off.
Changing autoreduction settings for incoming faxes
If the fit to page option is on, the product automatically reduces long faxes to fit on the product’s
default paper size (up to a 75% reduction), for example from legal to letter size.
If the fit to page option is turned off, long faxes print at full size on multiple pages.
If you have the stamp received faxes option on, you may want to turn autoreduction on also. This
reduces the size of incoming faxes just slightly and prevents the page stamp from forcing a
received fax page onto two pages.
Note
Make sure the paper size setting matches the size of paper loaded in the paper input tray. To change
To change autoreduction for incoming faxes
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fit to Pageand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Onor Offand press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory for incoming fax autoreduction is On.
Enabling stamp received faxes
The HP LaserJet 3330 product is set up to print the sender’s identification at the top of each
received fax. You can also choose to have your header information included on each received fax
to confirm the date and time the fax was received.
Note
This option only applies to received faxes that are printed by the product.
To enable stamp received faxes
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Stamp Faxesand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Onor Offand press menu/enter to save your selection.
98 7 Faxing
EN
Note
The default set at the factory for stamp received faxes is Off.
Setting the fax error correction
Normally, the product monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is sending or receiving a
fax. If the product detects an error signal during the transmission and the error correction setting is
on, the product can request that a portion of the fax be resent.
You should only turn error correction off if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax, and
you want to accept the errors in the transmission. Turning the setting off might be useful when you
are trying to send or receive a fax overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.
To change the error correction setting
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select All Faxesand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Error Correctionand press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to select Onor Offand press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note
The default set at the factory for error correction is On.
Selecting tone- or pulse-dialing mode
Use this procedure to set the product to tone- or pulse-dialing mode. The default is set to tone.
Leave this as tone unless you know your phone line is incapable of tone dialing.
To select tone- or pulse-dialing
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Press > once to select Fax Send Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Dialing Modeand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Toneor Pulseand press menu/enter to save your selection.
Changing redial settings
If the product was unable to send a fax because the receiving fax machine did not answer or was
busy, the product will attempt to redial based on the redial on busy and redial on no answer
options. Use the procedures in this section to turn these options on or off.
Note
The product will, by default, redial if the receiving fax machine is busy but will not, by default, redial
if the receiving fax machine does not answer.
EN
Setting the fax error correction 99
To turn the redial on busy option on or off
The product is set to redial busy numbers five times automatically.
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Send Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Redial On Busyand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Onor Offand press menu/enter.
To turn the redial on no answer on or off
If this option is turned on, the product is set to redial on no answer one time automatically in the
U.S. and Canada, and two times automatically for all other countries/regions.
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Send Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Redial-No Answerand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Onor Offand press menu/enter.
Using billing codes
If the billing codes feature has been turned on, the user will be asked to input a billing code for
each fax. The billing number will be credited for each fax page that is sent. This includes all types
of faxes except for poll receive, fax forwarding, or PC downloaded faxes. For an ad hoc group or a
group dial fax, the billing number will be credited for each successful fax sent to each destination.
The default setting is off. To print a report showing the total for each billing code, see Printing the
To turn billing codes on or off
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Send Setupand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Billing Codesand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Onor Offand press menu/enter.
Changing the V.34 setting
V.34 is the modem protocol used by the product to send faxes. It is the worldwide standard for
full-duplex modems sending and receiving data across telephone lines at 1,200 or 2,400 bps. The
default setting for V.34 is on.
To turn the V.34 setting on or off
1
2
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Setupand press menu/enter.
100 7 Faxing
EN
3
4
5
Use the < or > button to select All Faxesand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select V.34and press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Onor Offand press menu/enter.
Managing fax logs and reports
If you purchased an HP LaserJet 3330 product, use the following instructions to manage your fax
logs and reports:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Printing the fax activity log
On demand, you can print a log of the last 40 faxes. A fax activity log includes the following
information:
●
●
●
All faxes received to the product
All faxes sent from the control panel
All faxes sent from the HP LaserJet Document Manager (for Windows-compatible computers
directly connected to the product)
●
All faxes sent from the HP Workplace (for Macintosh-compatible computers directly connected
to the product)
Note
The HP LaserJet Document Manager isnot supported for Microsoft Windows 95 or for any Macintosh
OS prior to 9.1.
To print the fax activity log
Use the following steps to print a fax activity log:
1
2
3
4
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Activity Logand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Print Fax Log Now. The product exits the Menu settings and
prints the log.
EN
Managing fax logs and reports 101
Setting the fax activity log to print automatically
The fax activity log provides a chronological history of the last 40 faxes that were received, sent, or
deleted, as well as any errors that occurred. You can decide whether or not you want the fax log to
print automatically after every 40 entries.
To set the fax activity log to print automatically
Use the following steps to set the fax activity log to print automatically:
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Activity Log.
Press > once to select Auto Log Printingand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Onor Offand press menu/enter to confirm your selection.
Note
The factory default is On.
Printing a fax call report
A fax call report is a brief report indicating the status of the last sent or received fax.
To print a fax call report
1
2
3
4
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Call Reportand press menu/enter.
Press menu/enter to select Print Fax Call Now. The product exits the Menu settings and
prints the report.
Note
Setting fax call report print times
A fax call report is a brief report indicating the status of the last sent or received fax. You can set
your product to print a fax call report after the following events:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Every Fax Error (the default)
Send Fax Error
Receive Fax Error
Every Fax
Send Fax Only
Never
Note
If you choose Never, you will have no indication that a fax failed to transmit unless you print a fax
activity log.
102 7 Faxing
EN
To set fax call report print times
Use the following steps to set when the fax call report prints:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Call Reportand press menu/enter.
Press the > button once to select Print Reportand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select the option for when you want the fax call reports to print.
Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Including the first page of each fax on the fax call report
If this option is turned on, the fax call report will display a thumbnail (50% reduction) of the first
page of the last fax that was sent or received.
To include the first page of each fax on the fax call report
Use the following steps to include the first page of each fax on the fax call report:
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Fax Call Reportand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Include First Pageand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Onor Offand press menu/enter to confirm your selection.
Note
The default setting for this option is On.
Printing a phone book report
A phone book report lists the fax numbers that are assigned to the one-touch buttons and
speed-dial and group-dial codes.
To print a phone book report
Use the following steps to print a one-touch, speed-dial, and group-dial report:
1
2
3
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Phone Book Reportand press menu/enter. The product
exits the Menu settings and prints the report.
Printing the billing codes report
The billing codes report prints out a list of all fax billing codes with their total number of faxes.
After this report is printed, all billing data is reset to zero.
Note
EN
Including the first page of each fax on the fax call report 103
To print the billing codes report
1
2
3
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Billing Reportand press menu/enter. The product exits
the Menu settings and prints the report.
Printing a T.30 protocol trace report
This report is used by service technicians to troubleshoot fax transmission issues.
To print a T.30 protocol trace report
1
2
3
4
Press enter/menu.
Use the < or > button to select Serviceand press enter/menu.
Use the < or > button to select Print T.30 Traceand press enter/menu.
Use the < or > button to select Nowand press enter/menu. The product exits the Menu
settings and prints the report.
To set T.30 protocol trace report print times
You can set the T.30 protocol trace report to print at the following times:
●
●
●
Never (the default)
When an error occurs
At the end of every sent and received fax
Use the following steps to set the T.30 protocol trace report print times:
1
2
3
4
5
Press enter/menu.
Use the < or > button to select Serviceand press enter/menu.
Use the < or > button to select Print T.30 Traceand press enter/menu.
Use the < or > button to select when T.30 protocol trace reports will print.
Press enter/menu to save the selection.
Printing the block fax list
To print the block fax list
1
2
3
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Block Fax Listand press menu/enter. The product exits
the Menu settings and prints the list.
104 7 Faxing
EN
Printing all fax reports
Use this procedure to print the following reports at one time:
Fax activity log
One-touch, speed-dial, and group-dial report
●
●
●
●
●
Configuration report
Block fax list
Billing report (if on)
To print all fax reports
Use the following steps to print all fax reports:
1
2
3
Press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select Reportsand press menu/enter.
Use the < or > button to select All Fax Reportsand press menu/enter. The product exits
the Menu settings and prints the reports.
EN
Printing all fax reports 105
106 7 Faxing
EN
Understanding the print server’s features and benefits
If you use an HP Jetdirect 310x (or other compatible HP Jetdirect print server) with your
HP LaserJet 3300 printer, you can perform the following tasks:
●
Enhance workgroup productivity by placing your printer at a convenient location on the
network while improving network printer performance.
●
●
Connect your printer directly to the network.
Share scan and print functions with others on the network.
Note
You can only attach one printer to the print server. Do not use a USB hub to attach more than one
printer.
Using network protocols
Printing protocols
The HP Jetdirect 310x supports the following printing protocols:
●
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
• Port 9100
• IPP (Internet Printing Protocol)*
• LPD (Line Printer Daemon)*
• FTP (File Transfer Protocol)*
IPX/SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange)
• Novell NetWare*
●
• IPX peer-to-peer printing (called IPX direct mode)
DLC/LLC*
●
●
AppleTalk*
* Only print is available over these protocols. The other protocols support printing, scanning and
faxing over the network.
Scanning protocols
The HP Jetdirect 310x supports the following scanning protocols:
●
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
• Port 9100
• Embedded web server’s scan service
IPX/SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange)
• IPX peer-to-peer printing (called IPX direct mode)
●
Software installation
If you are setting up client-server printing on a Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, ME, XP, or 2000
network, you should use the installation software that came with your HP LaserJet 3300 product to
configure your Windows 95, 98, NT, ME, XP, or 2000 print server and then share the printer with
client computers.
108 8 Networking
EN
If you are setting up peer-to-peer printing on a Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, or 2000 network,
you should use the installation software that came with your HP LaserJet 3300 product to
configure each client to print directly to the printer.
Network connection requirements
If you purchased an HP LaserJet 3300 series model other than the HP LaserJet 3320n and are
connecting to a network, you will need a supported HP Jetdirect print server available from HP.
Your choice of print server depends on the type of network connection you have, the number of
devices you want to connect to the print server, and your network protocol.
The following print servers are supported with the HP LaserJet 3300 series and are available from
your local HP dealer or at http://www.buy.hp.com:
Model
Product
No.
Connectors
Firmware
version
Supported protocol
HP Jetdirect 75x
J6035A
Home phoneline 10-Mbits/s All
network—with a USB
printer connection.
TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
AppleTalk
HP Jetdirect 170x
J3258B (not 10Base-T parallel printer
All
TCP/IP (9100 only)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
supported)
J4102B
connection.
HP Jetdirect 175x
HP Jetdirect 300x
J6035A
10/100Base-Tx USB printer All
connection.
TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
AppleTalk
J3263A
J4101B
10/100Base-Tx (sometimes H.08.00 or
TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
called Ethernet and Fast
Ethernet) parallel printer
connection.
higher
AppleTalk
HP Jetdirect 310x
HP Jetdirect 500x
J6038A
J3265A
10/100Base-Tx USB printer All
connection.
TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
AppleTalk
BNC, 10/100Base-Tx
parallel printer network
connections—can connect
the product and up to two
other devices to the print
server.
J.08.00 or higher TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
AppleTalk
Note: The product is
supported only on Port 1 of
this print server.
EN
Network connection requirements 109
Model
Product
No.
Connectors
Firmware
version
Supported protocol
HP Jetdirect 500x
J3264A
Token Ring 3 twisted pair, J.08.00 or higher TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
(RJ-45) parallel printer
connections — can connect
the product and up to two
other devices to the print
server.
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
Note: The product is fully
supported only on Port 1 of
this print server.
Note
HP recommends against using print servers other than those listed above.
You can check the print server’s firmware revision number by printing a configuration report for the
110 8 Networking
EN
Installing the 310x print server
The HP Jetdirect 310x has a single USB port and an RJ-45 network port (10/100Base-Tx) for
connecting to a network. The following items are included with your HP Jetdirect 310x:
●
●
●
Power module
Clip (attached to server)
USB cable
To connect the product to a network
Use the procedure in this section to connect your HP LaserJet 3300
series product to the network using an HP Jetdirect 310x print server.
1
2
3
Note
The instructions below apply to the HP Jetdirect 310x that is included
with the HP LaserJet 3320n. If you are using a different Jetdirect print
server, you must refer to the installation instructions that came with that
print server.
Note
The USB cable should already be connected to the product. (For more
1
2
3
Plug the rectangular end of the USB cable, with the USB symbol
facing up, into the USB socket on the front of the print server. Make
sure the cable is fully inserted.
Attach the print server to a 10/100Base-Tx local network by
plugging the network cable into the network port on the rear of the
print server.
Plug the power module (supplied with the print server) into a power
outlet. Plug the other end of the power module cable into the power
socket on the rear of the print server.
EN
Installing the 310x print server 111
4
5
The 10 or 100 LED lights, indicating a network connection, and the
power/status LED should begin blinking. After 15 seconds, the
power/status LED should be solid green.
4
5
6
Press the test button on the rear of the print server to print a
configuration page. A configuration page should be printed by the
attached printer. If a page does not print or is unreadable, see
6
If you want to mount the print server to the product (or table or wall),
secure the attached mounting clip using the supplied sticky tape or
the mounting screw holes. You can use the location illustrated in
image 6 at left.
112 8 Networking
EN
Installing the network software
After you have successfully connected the HP LaserJet 3300 series product to your network, you
should install or reinstall the software that came with the product. The software must be installed
to take full advantage of the product features and to enable networked printing from each PC.
Note
If you are using a previously purchased HP Jetdirect print server, do not install the software that
came with it. Use the software that came with your HP LaserJet 3300 series product.
See the getting started guide that came with the product for complete instructions on installing the
software.
Using the embedded web server
Each HP Jetdirect 310x print server contains an embedded web server that you can access
through a compatible web browser on an intranet. The embedded web server provides access to
configuration and management pages for the print server and the attached printer. The networking
pages provide access to status and configuration information on the HP Jetdirect 310x print
server.
You can use the embedded web server to perform the following tasks:
●
●
●
●
Monitor the status of the printer and the print server
Make configuration changes to the print server to customize it for your network
Link to HP’s web site
Scan images over the network without installing the HP LaserJet 3300 series product software
Prerequisites
Computers with the TCP/IP protocol installed can use the embedded web server to monitor and
configure the printers networked with an HP Jetdirect print server. Use the installation program on
the product CD-ROM to set this up.
Before you can use the embedded web server, you must configure an IP address for the HP
Jetdirect print server. Use the installation program on the product CD-ROM to configure the IP
address.
Optionally, you can use BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) or DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) to automatically configure the IP address over the network each time the print server is
turned on.
Compatible web browsers
If you use Windows 9x, or NT 4.0, the embedded web server works with the following browsers:
●
●
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0, 5.01, or 5.5
Netscape Navigator 4.6x, 4.7x, 6.0, or 6.1
If you use Windows 2000, ME, or XP, the following browsers are supported:
●
●
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or 5.5
Netscape Navigator 4.6x, 4.7x, 6.0, or 6.1
If you use Mac OS 8.6 and later, or 9.0, the following browsers are supported:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01
●
EN
Installing the network software 113
●
Netscape Navigator 4.6x, 4.7x, 6.0, or 6.1
For the latest list of compatible web browsers, check HP’s Customer Care online at
http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing.
To start the embedded web server
After you establish an IP address on the print server, perform the following steps:
1
2
3
Run a supported web browser.
Enter the IP address of the print server as the URL. The print server’s home page displays.
Click the Help link on the web page for more information.
Note
If you change the IP address and other parameters, the connection to the embedded web server
closes. To re-establish a connection, use the new IP address as the URL. Also, some computer
setups may no longer work.
Using HP Web JetAdmin
HP Web JetAdmin is a printer installation and management application for intranets. You can
obtain this software from HP Customer Care online at http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing.
Hewlett-Packard recommends that you use HP Web JetAdmin version 6.5 or later for operation
with the print server’s embedded web server.
Using BOOTP
This section describes how to configure the print server using Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)
services on servers in some operating systems. BOOTP is used to download network
configuration data from a server to the HP Jetdirect print server over the network.
For BOOTP, the downloaded configuration data may also identify a file containing extended
configuration data. The HP Jetdirect print server downloads this file using TFTP. This TFTP
configuration file may be located on the BOOTP server or on a separate TFTP server.
Automatically downloading configuration data has the following benefits:
●
●
●
Ease of HP Jetdirect print server configuration. Complete network configuration can be
automatically downloaded each time the print server is powered on.
Ease of configuration management. Network configuration parameters for the entire network
can be in one location.
Enhanced configuration control of the print server. Configuration by other methods is limited to
select parameters.
When the print server is powered on, it broadcasts requests that contain its hardware address. A
server daemon searches servers for configuration data with a matching hardware address, and if
successful, sends the corresponding configuration data to the print server as a reply.
The factory-default state of the HP Jetdirect print server is to request its configuration data using
BOOTP requests first, and if no BOOTP reply is received, then to request its configuration data
using DHCP requests.
Note
If the print server and the BOOTP, TFTP, or DHCP server are located on different subnets, IP
configuration may fail unless the routing device supports “BOOTP Relay” (allows the transfer of
requests between subnets).
114 8 Networking
EN
Setting up the BOOTP server
Note
For systems using NIS (Network Information Service):
If your server uses NIS, you may need to rebuild the NIS map with the BOOTP service before
performing the BOOTP configuration steps. Refer to your system documentation.
The procedure to set up the DHCP server depends on the operating system on that system. (It
may be a system other than those using the HP Jetdirect print services.)
Windows 2000 or NT servers:
On Windows NT or 2000 server systems, use the Microsoft DHCP utilities to set up print server
configuration through BOOTP.
●
●
When you use the Windows NT DHCP procedure (with the finite lease duration and adding a
reservation in step 8), the resulting service will respond to BOOTP requests as well as to
When you use the Windows 2000 DHCP procedure, the resulting service will respond to
BOOTP requests when you select BOOTP only or Both in step 11d. See Windows 2000
These systems may require third-party software for TFTP support.
UNIX servers:
A BOOTP server running UNIX must be set up with the BOOTP daemon bootpd, and must be set
up with the /etc/bootptab configuration file. The configuration data in the /etc/bootptab file must be
TFTP is used to obtain additional configuration data from a configuration file on a TFTP server.
NetWare BOOTP servers:
For setup of NetWare BOOTP servers, refer to your NetWare documentation.
Bootptab file entries
The following is an example of an /etc/bootptabfile entry for an HP Jetdirect print server:
picasso:\
:hn:\
:ht=ether:\
:vm=rfc1048:\
:ha=0001E6123456:\
:ip=192.168.45.39:\
:sm=255.255.255.0:\
:gw=192.168.40.1:\
:lg=192.168.40.3:\
:T144=“hpnp/picasso.cfg”:
A colon (:) indicates the end of a field, and a backslash (\) indicates that the entire entry is
continued on the next line—more fields. Spaces are not allowed between the characters on a line.
Names, such as host names, must begin with a letter and can contain only letters, numbers,
periods (for domain names only), and hyphens. The underline character (_) is not allowed. Refer
to your systems documentation for more information.
The configuration data contains tags that identify the various HP Jetdirect parameters and their
settings. The following table describes these tags:
EN
Using BOOTP 115
Tag
RFC 2132 Description
Option
nodename
_
Name of the peripheral device. Identifies an entry point to a list of
parameters for the specific peripheral device. Must be the first field in an
entry. (In the example above, the nodenameis picasso.)
hn
ht
12
Host name tag. This tag does not take a value but causes the BOOTP
daemon to download the host name to the print server. The host name will
be printed on the Jetdirect configuration page, or returned on an SNMP
sysName request by a network application.
_
Hardware type tag. For this HP Jetdirect print server, set this to ether (for
Ethernet). Must precede the hatag.
vm
ha
_
_
The BOOTP report format tag (required). Set this tag to rfc1048.
Hardware address tag. The hardware (MAC) address is the link-level or
station address of the HP Jetdirect print server. It can be found on the
Jetdirect configuration page as the Hardware Address, and also printed on a
label attached to the print server. The httag must precede this tag.
ip
sm
_
1
IP address tag (required). This will be the print server's IP address.
Subnet mask tag. The subnet mask will be used by the print server to
identify the portions of an IP address that specify the network/subnetwork
number and the host address.
gw
3
Gateway IP address tag. This address identifies the IP address of the default
gateway (router) that the HP Jetdirect print server will use for
communications with other subnets.
ds
dn
6
DNS (Domain Name System) server’s IP address tag. Only a single name
server can be specified.
15
Domain name tag. Specifies the domain name for the print server (for
example, support.hp.com). It does not include the host name—it is not the
Fully Qualified Domain Name (such as printer1.support.hp.com).
ef
na
18
44
Extensions file tag that specifies the relative path name of the TFTP
configuration file. This tag is similar to the vendor-specific tag T144.
Tag for IP addresses of the NetBIOS-over-TCP/IP Name Server (NBNS). A
primary and secondary server may be specified in order of preference.
lease-time
51
58
59
DHCP IP address lease duration time (seconds).
tr
tv
DHCP T1 timeout, specifying the DHCP lease renewal time (seconds).
DHCP T2 timeout, specifying the DHCP lease rebind time (seconds).
116 8 Networking
EN
Tag
lg
RFC 2132 Description
Option
7
_
syslog server’s IP address tag. It specifies the server to which the print
server sends syslog messages.
T144
An HP-proprietary tag that specifies the relative path name of the TFTP
configuration file. Long path names may be truncated. The path name must
be in double quotes (“pathname”). For file format information, refer to the
TFTP file entries below. Note that standard BOOTP RFC-2132 option 18
(extensions file path) also allows the standard tag ef to specify the relative
path name of the TFTP configuration file.
T145
T146
_
_
Idle Timeout option. An HP-proprietary tag to set the idle timeout (seconds),
which is the amount of time that a print data connection may remain idle
before being closed. The range is 1–3600 seconds.
Buffer Packing option. An HP-proprietary tag to set buffer packing for TCP/IP
packets:
0: (default) Normal, data buffers are packed before sending to the printer.
1: Disable buffer packing, data is sent to the printer when received.
T147
_
Write Mode option. An HP-proprietary tag that controls the TCP PSH flag
setting for device-to-client data transfers:
0: (default) Disables this option, flag not set.
1: All-push option. Push bit is set in all data packets.
2: EOI-push option. Push bit is set only for data packets that have an
End-of-Information flag set.
T148
T149
_
_
IP Gateway Disable option. An HP-proprietary tag to prevent configuration of
a gateway IP address:
0: (default) Allows a gateway IP address.
1: Prevents a Gateway IP address from being configured.
Interlock Mode option. An HP-proprietary tag that specifies whether an
acknowledgement (ACK) on all TCP packets is required before the printer is
allowed to close a Port 9100 print connection.
T150
T151
_
_
TFTP server’s IP address option. An HP-proprietary tag to specify the IP
address of the server where the TFTP configuration file is located.
Network configuration option. An HP-proprietary tag to ensure other
dynamic configuration methods are not used:
BOOTP-ONLY: Send BOOTP requests only, not DHCP.
DHCP-ONLY: Send DHCP requests only, not BOOTP.
Use the following conventions for the bootptab file entries:
●
●
●
●
A colon (:) indicates the end of a field.
A backslash (\) indicates that the entry is continued on the next line.
Spaces are not allowed between the characters on a line.
Names, such as host names, must begin with a letter and can contain only letters, numbers,
periods (for domain names only), or hyphens.
●
The underscore character (_) is not allowed.
EN
Using BOOTP 117
See your system documentation or product software help for more information.
Using DHCP
The procedure to set up the DHCP server depends on the operating system on that system. (It
may be a system other than those using the HP Jetdirect print services.)
UNIX servers:
For instructions on setting up DHCP on UNIX systems, see the bootpd man page.
On HP-UX systems, a sample DHCP configuration file dhcptab may be located in the /etc
directory. Since HP-UX presently does not provide Dynamic Domain Name Services (DDNS) for
its DHCP implementations, HP recommends that you set all print server lease durations to infinite.
This ensures that the print server IP addresses remain static until dynamic name services are
provided.
Windows NT 4.0 servers:
You will set up a pool of IP addresses that the server can assign or lease to a requester.
Note
Note
To avoid problems resulting from IP addresses that change, HP recommends that all print servers
be assigned IP addresses with infinite leases or reserved IP addresses.
Windows NT Procedure
In addition to the general steps provided here, see also the instructions supplied with your DHCP
software.
1
On the Windows NT server, open the Program Manager window and double-click the Network
Administrator icon.
2
3
4
5
Double-click the DHCP Manager icon to open this window.
Select Server and select Server Add.
Type the server IP address, then click OK to return to the DHCP Manager window.
In the list of DHCP servers, click on the server you have just added, then select Scope and
select Create.
6
Select Set up the IP Address Pool. In the IP Address Pool section, set up the IP address
range by entering the beginning IP address in the Start Address box and entering the ending
IP address in the End Address box. Also enter the subnet mask for the subnet to which the IP
address pool applies. The starting and ending IP addresses define the end points of the
address pool assigned to this scope.
Note
If desired, you can exclude ranges of IP addresses within a scope.
7
In the Lease Duration section, select Unlimited, then select OK.
HP recommends that all print servers be assigned infinite leases to avoid problems resulting
from IP addresses that change. Be aware, however, that selecting an unlimited lease duration
for the scope (as described above) causes all clients in that scope to have infinite leases.
If you want clients on your network to have finite leases, you can instead set the duration to a
finite time, but you should configure all print servers as reserved clients for the scope.
118 8 Networking
EN
8
If you have set Lease Duration to Unlimited in the previous step, skip to the next step. If you
have set Lease Duration to a finite time, continue with this step:
Select Scope and select Add Reservations to set up your print servers as reserved clients.
For each print server, perform the following steps in the Add Reserved Clients window to set
up a reservation for that print server:
a
b
Type the selected IP address.
Obtain the hardware (MAC) address from the configuration page, and type this address in
the Unique Identifier box.
c
d
Input a client name.
Select Add to add the reserved client. To delete a reservation, in the DHCP Manager
window, select Scope and select Active Leases. In the Active Leases window, click on
the reservation you want to delete and select Delete.
9
Select Close to return to the DHCP Manager window.
10 If you do not plan to use WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service), skip to the next step. If
you plan to use WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service), continue with this step:
a
From the DHCP Manager window, select DHCP Options and select one of the following:
Scope: if you want name services only for the selected scope.
Global: if you want name services for all scopes.
b
Add the server to the Active Options list. In the DHCP Options window, select
WINS/NBNS Servers (044) from the Unused Options list. Select Add; then select OK.
A warning may appear requesting that you set the node type. You will do this in step 10d
below.
c
Now provide the IP address of the WINS server as follows:
i. Select Value, then Edit Array.
ii. From the IP Address Array Editor, select Remove to delete any undesired addresses
previously set. Then type in the IP address of the WINS server and select Add.
iii. Once the address appears in the list of IP addresses, select OK. This returns you to the
DHCP Options window. If the address you have just added appears in the list of IP
addresses (near the bottom of the window) continue to step 10d below. Otherwise, retry
step 10c.
d
In the DHCP Options window, select WINS/NBT Node Type (046) from the Unused
Options list. Select Add to add the node type to the Active Options list. In the Byte box,
input 0x4 to indicate a mixed node, and select OK.
11 Click Close to exit to the Program Manager.
Windows 2000 servers:
You will set up a pool of IP addresses that the server can assign or lease to a requester.
Note
To avoid problems resulting from IP addresses that change, HP recommends that all print servers
be assigned IP addresses with infinite leases or reserved IP addresses.
EN
Using DHCP 119
Windows 2000 Procedure
Note
In addition to the general steps provided here, see also the instructions supplied with your DHCP
software.
1
2
3
Run the Windows 2000 DHCP manager utility: Click Start, Settings, Control Panel. Open
the Administrative Tools folder and run the DHCP utility.
In the DHCP window, locate and select your Windows 2000 server in the DHCP tree.
If your server is not listed in the tree, select DHCP and click the Action menu to add the server.
After selecting your server in the DHCP tree, click the Action menu and select New Scope.
This runs the Add New Scope wizard.
4
5
6
In the Add New Scope wizard, click Next.
Enter a name and description for this scope, click Next.
Enter the range of IP addresses for this scope (beginning IP address and ending IP address).
Enter the subnet mask and click Next.
Note
If subnetting is used, the subnet mask defines which portion of an IP address specifies the subnet
and which portion specifies the client device.
7
If applicable, enter the range of IP addresses within the scope to be excluded by the server
and click Next.
8
Set the IP address lease duration for your DHCP clients and click Next.
HP recommends that all print servers be assigned reserved IP addresses. You can do this
after you set up the scope, as in step 11 below.
9
HP recommends that you select [No] to configure DHCP options for this scope later, and click
Next.
If you want to configure DHCP options now:
a
b
Select Yes and click Next.
If desired, specify the IP address of the router (or default gateway) to be used by clients
and click Next.
c
If desired, specify the Domain Name and DNS (Domain Name System) servers for clients
and click Next.
d
e
If desired, specify WINS server names and IP addresses and click Next.
Select Yes to activate the DHCP options now and click Next.
10 You have successfully set up the DHCP scope on this server. Click Finish to close the wizard.
11 To configure your print server with a reserved IP address within the DHCP scope:
a
b
c
In the DHCP tree, open the folder for your scope and select Reservations.
Click the Action menu and select New Reservation.
Enter the appropriate information in each field, including the reserved IP address for your
print server. (Note: the hardware (MAC) address for your print server is available on the
Jetdirect configuration page.)
d
Under “Supported types,” select DHCP only and click Add. This results in a DHCP
configuration.
Note
Selecting Both or BOOTP only results in a BOOTP configuration due to the sequence in which HP
Jetdirect print servers initiate configuration protocol requests.
120 8 Networking
EN
e
Specify another reserved client, or click Close. The reserved clients added will be
displayed in the Reservations folder for this scope.
12 Close the DHCP manager utility.
Configuring the print server for DHCP configuration
Once a DHCP server is set up (according to the previous section), the factory-default state of the
print server requires no further action for print server configuration.
Changing the BOOTP/DHCP configuration method
Other configuration tools that include IP configuration, such as the embedded web server or
Telnet, allow you to disable BOOTP and/or DHCP auto-configuration. In each of these tools, three
possible settings for the configuration method are provided; each of the settings has the effect of
disabling others, as follows:
●
●
●
BOOTP
The print server automatically releases any names and IP addresses associated with the
DHCP server and re-initializes the TCP/IP protocol for the print server (unless a BOOTP
configuration is currently in effect). At this point, TCP/IP is unconfigured, and the print server
begins to send—even before power is cycled—BOOTP requests to acquire new IP
configuration information. If no BOOTP reply is received, the IP address remains at the factory
default 192.0.0.192. DHCP is disabled.
After power to the print server is cycled, only BOOTP requests are sent and only BOOTP
replies are processed. Any configuration of IP parameters done manually is ignored.
DHCP
The print server automatically releases any names and IP addresses associated with the
BOOTP server and re-initializes the TCP/IP protocol for the print server (unless a BOOTP
configuration is currently in effect). At this point, TCP/IP is unconfigured, and the print server
begins to send—even before power is cycled—DHCP requests to acquire new IP
configuration information. If no DHCP reply is received, the IP address remains at the factory
default 192.0.0.192. BOOTP is disabled.
After power to the print server is cycled, only DHCP requests are sent and only DHCP replies
are processed. Any configuration of IP parameters done manually is ignored.
Manual
BOOTP and DHCP are disabled.
You should proceed to manually set all of the IP configuration parameters, including IP
address, subnet mask, default gateway, and idle timeout. You can use the settings available in
the same tool you are using.
CAUTION
If the print server is switched from using an address allocated by a DHCP server to using a manually
assigned address, that manually assigned address should be outside any DHCP range used for
other devices on the network. An alternative is to tell the DHCP server that the print server's address
is fixed so that it will never be allocated to another client.
Returning to factory defaults
You can return the print server to its factory-default state (also called “cold reset”) by using the
factory-default reset procedure. See Resetting the 310x print server to factory defaults (cold
EN
Using DHCP 121
Moving to another network
When you move an HP Jetdirect print server that is configured with an IP address to a new
network, make sure that the IP address does not conflict with the IP addresses on the new
network. You can change the print server’s IP address to one that can be used on the new
network, or you can erase the current IP address and configure another IP address after you
install the print server on the new network. Cold reset the print server (see Resetting the 310x
If the current BOOTP server cannot be reached, you might need to find a different BOOTP server
and configure the printer to that server.
If you used BOOTP or DHCP to configure the print server, edit the appropriate system files with
updated settings. If you manually set the IP address, reconfigure the IP parameters.
Follow the instructions on the appropriate home page to configure or modify your printer. These
instructions show you how to configure your printer and set up the printer for printing.
Note
You can substitute the server domain with the TCP/IP address.
Printing a print server configuration page
If you connect your HP LaserJet 3300 series product to a network, use the following instructions to
print out a configuration page with information about your print server.
To print a Jetdirect configuration page
Briefly press the test button on the rear panel of the print server. If you are not sure if the
configuration page is in the process of printing, check the power/status LED. If the page never
For more information
For more information on the print server, see the HP support web site for the HP LaserJet 3300
series: http://www.hp.com/support/lj3300 (site is in English).
122 8 Networking
EN
Cleaning the outside of the product
To clean the exterior
Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off the exterior of the product.
To clean the glass
Dirty glass, from fingerprints, smudges, hair, and so on, slows down performance and affects the
accuracy of special features such as fit to page and copy.
1
Turn off the product, unplug the power cord from the electrical socket, and raise the lid.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
Clean the glass with a soft cloth or sponge slightly moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
2
CAUTION
Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on the glass; these
can damage it. Do not place liquids directly on the glass. They may seep under it and damage the
product.
3
Dry the glass with a chamois or cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
Note
Dust might appear on the underside of the glass, but this cannot be cleaned and it has no effect on
the copy or scan quality.
To clean the lid backing
Minor debris can accumulate on the white document lid backing located underneath the product’s
lid.
1
Turn off the product, unplug the power cord from the electrical socket, and raise the lid.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2
Clean the white document lid backing with a soft cloth or sponge slightly moistened with a mild
soap and warm water.
3
4
Wash the backing gently to loosen debris; do not scrub the backing.
Dry the backing with a chamois or soft cloth.
CAUTION
Do not use paper-based wipes as these may scratch the backing.
5
If this does not clean the backing well enough, repeat the previous steps using isopropyl
alcohol, and then wipe the backing thoroughly with a damp cloth to remove any residual
alcohol.
124 9 Cleaning and maintenance
EN
Cleaning the print cartridge area
You do not need to clean the print cartridge area often. However, cleaning this area can improve
the quality of your printed sheets. During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can
accumulate inside the printer. Over time, this buildup can cause print quality problems, such as
toner specks or smearing. To correct and prevent these types of problems, you can clean the print
cartridge area and the printer media path.
To clean the print cartridge area
WARNING!
1
2
3
Wait for the printer to cool before beginning this procedure.
1
Before cleaning the printer, turn the printer off by unplugging the
power cord.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2
Open the print cartridge door, and remove the print cartridge.
CAUTION
To prevent damage, do not expose the print cartridge to light. Cover the
print cartridge if necessary. Also, do not touch the black sponge transfer
roller inside the printer. By doing so, you can damage the printer.
3
With a dry, lint-free cloth, or an HP toner cloth (part number
5090-3379), wipe any residue from the media path area and the
print cartridge cavity.
4
5
Replace the print cartridge, and close the print cartridge door.
Plug the printer in to turn it back on. If you have a 220V product,
turn on the power switch.
Note
Do not spray or use water inside the printer.
4
Note
If toner gets on your clothing or other fabric, wipe off the toner with a dry
cloth. Wash the items in cold water and air dry.
CAUTION
Hot water or heat from a dryer can set toner into fabric.
5
EN
Cleaning the print cartridge area 125
Cleaning the printer media path
If you are experiencing toner specks or dots on the printouts, clean the printer media path.
To clean the printer media path
1
2
3
4
5
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to find the service menu.
Press menu/enter.
Use the < and > buttons to find the Cleaning Mode.
Press menu/enter.
Cleaning the pickup roller
If the printer regularly mispicks, you might need to change or clean the pickup roller. Before
replacing the pickup roller you may want to try to clean it. To clean the pickup roller, follow the
instructions below:
To clean the pickup roller
Remove the pickup roller as described in steps 1 through 5 of Changing
1
1
Dab a lint-free cloth in isopropyl alcohol, and clean the roller with it.
WARNING!
Alcohol is flammable. Keep the alcohol and cloth away from an open
flame. Before you close the printer and plug in the power cord, allow the
alcohol to dry completely.
2
2
3
Using a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe the pickup roller to remove
loosened dirt.
Allow the pickup roller to dry completely before you reinstall it in the
3
126 9 Cleaning and maintenance
EN
Changing the pickup roller
To change the pickup roller
1
CAUTION
Failure to complete this procedure might damage the printer.
1
Unplug the power cord from the printer, and allow the printer to
cool.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2
2
3
4
Open the print cartridge door, and remove the print cartridge.
Find the pickup roller.
Release the small, white tabs on either side of the pickup roller, and
rotate the pickup roller toward the front.
5
Gently pull the pickup roller up and out.
3
4
5
EN
Changing the pickup roller 127
6
Position the new or cleaned part in the slot of the previous pickup
6
Note
Circular and rectangular pegs on each side prevent you from incorrectly
positioning the pickup roller.
7
Rotate the top of the new pickup roller away from you until both
sides snap into place.
7
Note
Touching the black sponge roller may damage the product.
8
9
Reinstall the print cartridge, and close the print cartridge door.
Plug the printer in to turn it back on. If you have a 220V product,
turn on the power switch.
8
9
128 9 Cleaning and maintenance
EN
Changing the printer separation pad
If your input tray feeds more than one page at a time, you might need to change the printer
separation pad. Recurring feed problems indicate that the printer separation pad is worn. If your
Note
instructions.
To change the printer separation pad
1
2
Unplug the power cord from the printer, and allow the printer to
cool.
2
Verify the power is off.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
3
4
5
Remove the input trays.
3
4
5
Find the blue separation pad.
To pry the separation pad up from the spring-loaded base, insert a
flat-edged screwdriver in the slot under the separation pad and twist
until the tabs are free.
Note
Touching the black sponge roller may damage the product.
EN
Changing the printer separation pad 129
6
7
Reach in through the opening, push the spring-loaded base down
(A) with one hand, and pull the separation pad up (B) with the other
hand.
6
7
8
With one hand, position the new separation pad in the slot of the
previous separation pad (A). With the other hand, reach through the
input tray opening, and push the spring-loaded base down (B).
Note
The tab on the right is larger to help you position it correctly.
8
Snap both sides of the separation pad firmly into place.
CAUTION
Make sure that the separation pad is straight and that there is no space
between the separation pad and the spring-loaded base. If the
separation pad is not straight or you see space on one side, remove the
separation pad, make sure that the larger tab is on the right, reinsert the
separation pad, and snap both sides into place.
9
Reinsert the input trays.
10 Plug the printer in to turn it back on. If you have a 220V product,
turn on the power switch.
Note
If the pad is not properly positioned, the printer may be noisy or the
paper will not feed at all.
9
10
130 9 Cleaning and maintenance
EN
Installing a new ADF
If your HP LaserJet 3300 came without an ADF, you can upgrade it by adding one. The ADF
replaces your current lid, includes a 50-page input tray, and installation takes only a few seconds.
Adding the ADF will save you time and effort when making copies of multiple page documents. If
you are experiencing abnormal media jams in your current ADF, you may need to replace it. See
To install a new or replacement ADF
1
Remove the flatbed scanner lid by opening it and gently lifting
straight up.
1
Note
If you are replacing an existing ADF, you must first pull up both hinge
tabs before lifting the ADF up out of the product.
2
3
4
On the new ADF, unfold the hinges and pull up the tab on each
hinge.
2
Install the new ADF by inserting the hinges straight down into the
product.
Push down both tabs until they click.
3
4
EN
Installing a new ADF 131
5
Gently close the ADF lid.
5
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the product, do not allow the ADF lid to fall onto the
flatbed scanner. Always close the ADF lid when the product is not in
use.
6
Install the ADF input tray by aligning the two tabs on the input tray
with the two grooves in the ADF lid and sliding the tray into the
grooves until it snaps into place.
6
132 9 Cleaning and maintenance
EN
Changing an ADF pickup roller assembly
If your ADF has trouble picking paper, you may want to replace the ADF pickup roller assembly.
existing assembly, follow the directions below.
1
Unplug the power cord from the printer.
1
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2
3
Remove the input tray and open the ADF cover.
Press the round green button while lifting the green lever. Rotate
the green lever until it stops in the open position. The old pickup
roller assembly should remain on the black surface.
2
4
5
Remove the old assembly and put the new one in exactly the same
place. The largest roller goes in back, and the gear side will be
away from you.
Lower the green lever with the flat green part fitting in between the
rollers. Press down on the green lever until a snap is heard.
3
4
5
EN
Changing an ADF pickup roller assembly 133
6
To check for proper installation, lift the green lever until it remains
open. The new pickup roller assembly should be secured to the
lever assembly and should not fall out.
6
7
8
Make sure that both sides of the assembly are secured by the
green hooks.
Lower the green lever assembly and close the ADF lid. Reinstall the
input tray.
7
Note
If you are experiencing abnormal jams in the ADF, you may want to
8
134 9 Cleaning and maintenance
EN
Removing and replacing the control panel bezel
1
Unplug the power cord from the printer.
1
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2
Remove the existing control panel bezel by lifting up on both sides
of the bezel edges until all the snaps are disengaged. Set the old
bezel aside.
2
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch any components or buttons inside the exposed
control panel area.
3
4
5
Align the new bezel at the lower notch. The bezel notch should
align to the inside of the printer.
Press down until all the snaps are engaged, and then press
outward until the bezel is secured.
3
Plug the printer in to turn it back on. If you have a 220V product,
turn on the power switch.
4
EN
Removing and replacing the control panel bezel 135
136 9 Cleaning and maintenance
EN
Product media specifications
HP LaserJet printers produce excellent print quality. The printer accepts a variety of media, such
as cut-sheet paper (including recycled paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies, vellum, and
custom-sized paper. Properties such as weight, grain, and moisture content are important factors
affecting printer performance and output quality.
The printer can use a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in
this user guide. Media that does not meet these guidelines might cause the following problems:
●
●
●
Poor print quality
Increased media jams
Premature wear on the printer, requiring repair
For best results, use only HP brand paper and print media. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot
recommend the use of other brands. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence or
control their quality.
It is possible for media to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce
satisfactory results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and
humidity levels, or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.
Before you purchase a large quantity of media, make sure that it meets the requirements specified
in this user guide and in Guidelines for Paper and Other Print Media. (See Ordering HP parts and
purchase a large quantity.
CAUTION
Using media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard’s specifications might cause problems for the
printer, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty or service
agreements.
Supported media sizes (printer)
The following are the supported media sizes:
●
●
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Guidelines for using media
Paper
For best results, use conventional paper. Make sure that the paper is of good quality and free of
cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or bent edges.
If you are unsure about what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or recycled), check the
label on the package of paper.
Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to the printer.
Note
Note
Do not use letterhead that is printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in some types
of thermography.
Do not use raised letterhead.
138 10 Media
EN
Note
The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Make sure that any colored paper or
preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with the printer temperature (200° C or 392° F for 0.1
second).
Common media problems table
Symptom
Problem with paper
Solution
Poor print quality or toner
adhesion, or problems with
feeding.
Too moist, too rough, too smooth, or Try another kind of paper between
embossed.
100 and 250 Sheffield and 4 to 6%
moisture content.
Faulty paper lot.
Dropouts, jamming, or curl.
Stored improperly.
Might be too heavy.
Store paper flat in its moisture-proof
wrapping.
Increased gray background
shading.
Use lighter paper.
Excessive curl, or problems
with feeding.
Too moist, wrong grain direction, or
short-grain construction.
Use long-grain paper.
Print using the straight-through
output path.
Jamming, or damage to
printer.
Cutouts or perforations.
Ragged edges.
Do not use paper with cutouts or
perforations.
Problems with feeding.
Use good quality paper.
Labels
When selecting labels, consider the quality of the following factors:
●
●
●
●
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200° C (392° F), the printer’s
maximum temperature.
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off
sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inch) of curl in any
direction.
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. Never
use a sheet of labels that has already been run through the printer.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand 200° C (392° F), the printer’s maximum temperature.
EN
Guidelines for using media 139
Envelopes
Envelope construction
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between
manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on
envelopes depends on the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the
following factors:
●
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28-pound), or
jamming might result.
●
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.25 inch) curl
and should not contain air. Envelopes that trap air may cause problems.
●
●
Condition: Make sure that the envelopes are not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
Sizes: From 90 x 160 mm (3.5 x 6.3 inches) to 178 x 254 mm (7 x 10 inches).
Envelopes with double-side seams
An envelope with double-side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope
rather than diagonal seams. This style might be more likely to wrinkle. Make sure that the seam
extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as shown in the following illustration:
Acceptable
Unacceptable
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use
adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the printer: 200° C (392° F). The extra flaps
and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams.
Envelope storage
Proper storage of envelopes contributes to good print quality. You should store envelopes flat. If air
is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, the envelope might wrinkle during printing.
Card stock and heavy media
You can print many types of card stock from the paper input tray, including index cards and
postcards. Some card stock performs better than others because its construction is better suited
for feeding through a laser printer.
For optimum printer performance, do not use paper heavier than 157 g/m2 (42-pound). Paper that
is too heavy might cause misfeeds, stacking problems, paper jams, poor toner fusing, poor print
quality, or excessive mechanical wear.
140 10 Media
EN
Note
You might be able to print on heavier paper if you do not fill the input tray to capacity and if you use
paper with a smoothness rating of 100 to 180 Sheffield.
Card stock construction
●
Smoothness: 135-157 g/m2 (36-to 42-pound) card stock should have a smoothness rating of
100 to 180 Sheffield. 60-135 g/m2 (16- to 36-pound) card stock should have a smoothness
rating of 100 to 250 Sheffield.
●
●
●
Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 5 mm (0.2 inch) of curl.
Condition: Make sure that the card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
Sizes: Only use card stock within the following size ranges:
• Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
• Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Card stock guidelines
●
If the card stock curls or jams, print using the straight-through output path.
Set margins at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) away from the edges.
●
Selecting media for the ADF
ADF specifications
●
Input capacity: The ADF holds up to 50 sheets of flat 60 to 90 g/m (16- to 24-pound) plain
paper.
●
Media size: Only use plain paper within the following size ranges:
• Minimum: 127 mm x 127 mm (5 x 5 inches)
• Maximum: 215.9 mm x 381 mm (8.5 x 15 inches)
Note
Use the flatbed scanner for copying and scanning if the media is fragile, thin, or thick. The flatbed
scanner provides the best copy and scan quality. The ADF is recommended for plain paper copying,
scanning, and faxing (faxing can be done only from the ADF).
EN
Selecting media for the ADF 141
142 10 Media
EN
Ordering HP parts and accessories
HP parts and accessories chart
You can increase the product’s capabilities with optional accessories and supplies. Use
accessories and supplies designed specifically for your HP LaserJet 3300 product to ensure
optimum performance.
Item
Description or use
Part number
Product
memory
Dual in-line memory Boosts the product’s ability to handle complex
module (DIMM) print jobs or increases available fonts.
●
Maximum add on: 64 MB
●
Available DIMMs:
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
64 MB
C7842A
C7843A
C7845A
C7846A
Cables and
interface
accessories
Parallel cables
Method of connectivity from product to computer.
●
2-meter IEEE 1284-B cable
C2950A
C2951A
●
3-meter IEEE 1284-B cable
USB cable
ADF
Method of connectivity from product to computer.
2-meter cable
●
8121-0539
If your printer did not come with an ADF, use this C9143A
part number to order one.
Printer server HP Jetdirect 310x
Connects the HP LaserJet 3300n mfp printer to a J6038A
network.
Printing
supplies
HP Multipurpose
paper
HP brand paper for a variety of uses (1 box of
10 reams, 500 sheets each).
HPM1120
HPJ1124
HP LaserJet paper
Premium HP brand paper for use with HP
LaserJet printers (1 box of 10 reams, 500 sheets
each).
HP LaserJet
transparency film
HP brand transparency film for use with HP
LaserJet monochrome printers.
92296T (letter)
92296U (A4)
Print cartridges print cartridges
Replacement print cartridges for the
HP LaserJet 3300.
●
2,500 page cartridge
C7115A
C7115X
●
3,500 page cartridge
Supplementary Guidelines for Paper A guide to using paper and other print media with 5963-7863
documentation and Other Print
Media
HP LaserJet printers.
144 11 HP parts and accessories
EN
Item
Description or use
Part number
Replacement Paper pickup roller
parts
Used to pick the paper from the paper input tray RF0-1008-000CN
and advance it through the printer.
Main input tray
Used to hold media for the printer.
RG0-1121-000CN
Priority input tray
Used to feed special media or for printing a first RG0-1122-000CN
page.
ADF input tray
Used to feed documents into the scanner.
C9143-60102
Separation pad for
the printer
Used to keep multiple sheets from feeding
through the printer path.
RF0-1014-000CN
ADF pickup roller
assembly
Used to pick the paper from the ADF paper input C7309-60016
tray and advance it through the ADF.
ADF
If your ADF breaks, use this part number to order C9143-60101
one (includes flatbed scanner lid).
Copy lid
If you do not have an ADF and your copy lid
breaks, use this part number to order one.
C9124-60117
Power modules (network model only)
Countries/Regions
Part number
0950-3172
0950-3358
0950-2806
0950-3347
0950-3170
0950-3349
0950-3173
0950-3352
9100-5168
0950-3351
9100-5171
0950-3354
0950-3171
0950-3350
Input rating
Output rating
Australia, New Zealand,
Argentina
240 Vac 50 Hz
13 Vdc @ 300 mA
13 Vdc @ 800 mA
13 Vdc @ 300 mA
13 Vdc @ 800 mA
13 Vdc @ 300 mA
13 Vdc @ 800 mA
13 Vdc @ 300 mA
13 Vdc @ 800 mA
13 Vdc @ 625 mA
13 Vdc @ 800 mA
13 Vdc @ 625 mA
13 Vdc @ 800 mA
13 Vdc @ 300 mA
13 Vdc @ 800 mA
240 Vac 50 Hz
China
220 Vac 50 Hz
220 Vac 50 Hz
Continental Europe
Japan
230 Vac 50 Hz
230 Vac 50 Hz
100 Vac 50 Hz
100 Vac 50 Hz
South Korea
South Africa, India
220–240 Vac 50 Hz
220 Vac 50 Hz
220–250 Vac 50 Hz
220–250 Vac 50 Hz
220–240 Vac 50 Hz
220–240 Vac 50 Hz
United Kingdom, Singapore,
Ireland, Hong Kong SAR
EN
Ordering HP parts and accessories 145
Country/Regions
Part number
0950-3169
0950-3348
Input rating
Output rating
US, Canada, Latin America,
Taiwan
110–127 Vac 60 Hz
110–127 Vac 60 Hz
13 Vdc @ 300 mA
13 Vdc @ 800 mA
Note
If two parts are listed for one country/region, either part can be used regardless of output rating.
HP LaserJet print cartridges
This section contains the following information on HP LaserJet print cartridges:
●
●
●
●
●
●
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new,
refilled, or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design
or control their quality. Service or repair required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge will
not be covered under the printer warranty.
If you use a non-HP print cartridge, the printer is unable to report on the number of pages that can
still be printed with the amount of toner left in the cartridge. The toner level estimate will only be an
approximate percentage.
Note
The warranty does not apply to defects resulting from software, interfacing, or parts not supplied by
HP.
146 11 HP parts and accessories
EN
To install a print cartridge
To install a print cartridge, use the following steps:
1
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
1
2
Open the print cartridge door.
Remove the print cartridge from its packaging, and locate the
sealing tape at the end of the cartridge.
2
3
To remove the sealing tape from the cartridge, grasp the tape and
pull it straight out from the cartridge. Avoid touching any black print
on the tape.
4
5
Insert the cartridge as shown, with the arrows pointing into the
product.
Close the print cartridge door. The print cartridge engages when
the door is closed.
3
Note
If toner gets on your clothing or other fabric, wipe off the toner with a dry
cloth. Wash the items in cold water and air dry.
CAUTION
4
Hot water or heat from a dryer can set toner into fabric.
5
Storing print cartridges
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it. The shelf life of a
print cartridge in an unopened package is approximately 2.5 years. The shelf life of a print
cartridge in an opened package is approximately 6 months.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light.
EN
HP LaserJet print cartridges 147
Print cartridge life expectancy
The life of the print cartridge depends on the amount of toner that your print jobs require. When
printing text at 5% coverage, the standard print cartridge (C7115A) lasts an average of 2,500
pages. The extended life print cartridge (C7115X) lasts an average of 3,500 pages. This assumes
that you set the print density to 3 and turn EconoMode off (these are the default settings).
Recycling print cartridges
To reduce landfill waste, Hewlett-Packard has adopted a recycling program for empty print
cartridges. A postage-paid shipping label is inside the new HP LaserJet print cartridge box. Since
1990, the HP LaserJet Print Cartridge Recycling Program has collected more than 25 million used
HP LaserJet print cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the world’s landfills. To
join this recycling effort, follow the instructions provided in the new print cartridge box.
To install a new HP print cartridge, see To install a print cartridge or follow the instructions included
in the print cartridge box. See the recycling information on the print cartridge box and the HP
Printing Supplies Environmental Program Information included in the print cartridge box.
Saving toner
To save toner, select the EconoMode option in your printer properties settings. While in
EconoMode (Save Toner), the printer uses less toner on each page. Selecting this option will
extend the life of the print cartridge and reduce your cost per page, but it will reduce print quality.
DIMMs (memory or font)
If you add a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) to the HP LaserJet 3300 product, you can
perform more complex product tasks or add additional fonts.
Use this information to manage DIMMs with your HP LaserJet 3300 product:
●
●
●
To test a DIMM installation or removal
After installing or removing a memory DIMM, you can test your work by printing a configuration
page and checking the Memory Available shown on the page. For more information, see Printing a
148 11 HP parts and accessories
EN
To install a DIMM
CAUTION
1
Handling a DIMM without wearing a grounded, antistatic device might
damage the DIMM. Do not touch the contacts on the side of the DIMM.
1
Turn off the power switch (220V product only), and unplug the
printer.
2
3
Open the print cartridge door and the left side panel.
Remove the DIMM from the antistatic bag it came in, grasping the
DIMM on the top edge.
2
4
Position the DIMM in front of the slot located inside the left side
panel. The gold contacts should be pointing toward the printer and
the cutouts should be at the top and bottom.
3
4
EN
DIMMs (memory or font) 149
5
Carefully press the DIMM into the slot, making sure that it is straight
and pushed in all the way (A). The cam latches, located at the top
and bottom, should rotate inward. To snap the cam latches into
place, press the handles toward each other (B).
5
6
7
Close the left side panel and the print cartridge door.
Plug the product back in. If you have a 220V product, turn on the
power switch.
A
B
6
7
150 11 HP parts and accessories
EN
To remove a DIMM
CAUTION
1
Handling a DIMM without wearing a grounded, antistatic device might
damage the DIMM. Do not touch the contacts on the side of the DIMM.
1
2
3
Switch off the power (220V product only), and unplug the product.
Open the print cartridge door and the left side panel.
To unlock the cam latches, press them outward (A). Grasp the
DIMM on the edge, gently pull straight out, and remove the DIMM
from the printer (B).
2
Note
Store the DIMM in an antistatic bag.
4
5
Close the left side panel and the print cartridge door.
Plug the product back in. If you have a 220V product, switch on the
power.
3
4
5
A
B
EN
DIMMs (memory or font) 151
152 11 HP parts and accessories
EN
Product will not turn on or print
Is the parallel or USB cable working and connected correctly?
The parallel or USB cable might be defective. Try the following:
●
●
●
Disconnect the parallel or USB cable at both ends and reconnect it.
Try printing a job that has printed in the past.
●
Contact the manufacturer of your computer about changing parallel port settings to an ECP
(extended capabilities port).
Are other devices running on your computer?
●
The HP LaserJet 3300 series product may not share a parallel port. If you have an external
hard drive or network switchbox connected to the same port as the HP LaserJet 3300, the
other device might be interfering. To connect and use the HP LaserJet 3300, you must
disconnect the other device or you must use two ports on the computer.
●
You might need to add another interface card. Hewlett-Packard strongly recommends an ECP
parallel interface card.
Is the product getting power?
●
If you are using a power strip, make sure the power strip is on. Or, try plugging the product
directly into the power outlet.
●
●
●
Test the power outlet to make sure it is working.
If you have plugged the product into a switched outlet, make sure the switch is on.
If you have a 220V product, make sure the power is switched on.
WARNING!
If the product still does not turn on after you try the above tips, it may have a mechanical failure.
Unplug the product from the power outlet and contact HP. Refer to the support flyer that came with
the product for information on contacting HP.
Pages print but are totally blank
Is the sealing tape still in the print cartridge?
The sealing tape may still be in the print cartridge. Remove the print cartridge and pull out the
sealing tape. Reinstall the print cartridge. Try printing the file again.
Does the file have blank pages?
The file may have blank pages. Check the file you are printing to determine whether there is
content on all of its pages.
Is the original loaded correctly?
If you are making a copy, the original might be loaded incorrectly. The original must be loaded into
the ADF face up. If loaded print side down, the copy will print out blank.
154 12 Troubleshooting printing problems
EN
Pages did not print
Is there a message on your computer screen?
Is media being pulled into the printer correctly?
Are there media jams?
Pages printed, but there was a problem
Is the print quality poor?
Is the printed page different than what appeared onscreen?
Are the printer settings appropriate for the media?
Onscreen error messages
Printer not responding/error writing to LPT1
Check the following:
●
●
Is the product in its Ready state?
Are the power cord and parallel or USB cable correctly connected?
Try the following:
●
●
Disconnect the power cord and parallel or USB cable at both ends and reconnect them.
Use another IEEE 1284-B-compliant parallel or USB cable.
Cannot access port (in use by another application)
There is a device conflict. This might occur if another device is installed on your computer and
running status software. The status software dominates the parallel port on the computer and will
not allow the HP LaserJet 3300 to access the port.
Try the following:
●
●
Disable all of the status windows for other printers.
Make sure that the printer’s port setting is correct. Access the port settings on the Printer
Properties Details tab.
EN
Pages did not print 155
Paper handling problems
Print is skewed (crooked)
Are the media guides adjusted properly?
Adjust the media guides to the width and length of the media that you are using and try reprinting.
information.
More than one sheet feeds at one time
Is the media input tray too full?
Is the media wrinkled, folded, or damaged?
Make sure the media is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. Try media from a new or different
package.
Is the printer separation pad worn?
Product does not pull media from the media input tray
Is the product in manual feed mode?
Try one of the following:
●
●
If Manual Feedappears in the control panel display, press menu/enter to print the job.
Make sure that the printer is not in manual feed mode and print your job again.
Is the pickup roller dirty or damaged?
Media curls when fed through product
●
Open the straight-through output door to print straight through.
●
Printed page is different from what appeared onscreen
Is the text garbled, incorrect, or incomplete?
First, print a configuration page to verify the product is functioning. See Printing a configuration
●
Disconnect the cable and reconnect it at both ends.
156 12 Troubleshooting printing problems
EN
●
●
Try printing a job that you has printed correctly.
If possible, attach the cable and printer to another computer, and try printing a job that you
know has printed correctly.
●
●
●
The wrong printer driver might have been selected when the software was installed. Make
sure that the HP LaserJet 3300 is selected in the printer properties.
There might be a problem with your software application. Try printing from another software
application.
Are graphics or text missing? Are there blank pages?
●
Make sure that your file does not contain blank pages.
●
The sealing tape might still be in the print cartridge. Remove the print cartridge, and pull out
the sealing tape.
●
●
instructions.
●
●
The graphic settings in the printer properties might not be correct for the type of job that you
The printer driver might not work for the type of job that you are printing. Try using a different
printer driver.
Note
If you use a different printer driver, some product features may not be accessible.
Is the page format different than on another printer?
If you used an older or different printer driver (printer software) to create the document or the
printer properties settings in the software are different, the page format might change when you try
to print using your new printer driver or settings. To help eliminate this problem, try the following:
●
Create documents and print them using the same printer driver (printer software) and printer
properties settings regardless of which HP LaserJet printer you use to print them.
●
Change the resolution, paper size, font settings, and other settings. See Changing settings
Is graphics quality poor?
The graphics settings might be unsuitable for your print job. Try the following:
●
●
Check the graphic settings, such as resolution, in the printer properties and adjust them as
Try using a different printer driver (software).
Note
If you use a different printer driver, some product features may not be accessible.
EN
Printed page is different from what appeared onscreen 157
Clearing media jams
●
Make sure you are printing with media that meets specifications. See Product media
●
●
●
Make sure that you are printing with media that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged.
If you are printing to the straight-through output path, close and open the door again to make
sure the green release levers are closed.
To clear a media jam
1
2
3
4
CAUTION
Media jams might result in loose toner on the page. If you get any toner
on your clothes, wash them in cold water. Hot water will permanently set
the toner into the fabric.
1
2
Open the print cartridge door and the straight-through output door.
Rotate the green pressure release levers at the back of the product
downward. If you can remove the media from the front of the
machine without removing the print cartridge, do so, and continue
with step 4.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light.
3
4
Remove the print cartridge, and place it aside.
With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible
(this includes the middle), and carefully pull it free from the printer.
5
When you have removed the jammed media, replace the print
cartridge, and close the print cartridge door and the
straight-through output door.
Note
The pressure release levers automatically close when you close the
straight-through output door.
After clearing a media jam, you might need to turn the printer off and
turn it back on.
Note
When you add new media, remove all of the media from the input tray
and straighten the stack of new media.
158 12 Troubleshooting printing problems
EN
To clear other media jams
If the paper has crumpled and jammed in the back of the product, open the straight-through output
door. Gently pull the paper out of the rollers. Close the straight-through output door.
If the paper has jammed where it exits the product, grasp the leading edge of the paper and pull
the paper out through the output tray.
Note
If you turned the product off before clearing the paper jam, turn it back on, and then restart your
printing or copying job.
Tips to avoid media jams
●
Make sure the input tray is not overfilled. The input tray capacity varies depending on the type
of paper you are using.
●
●
●
Check that the input tray is in place.
Do not add paper to the input tray while the product is printing.
types.
●
●
Do not let paper stack up in the output tray. The paper type and the amount of ink used affect
the output tray’s capacity.
Check the power connection. Make sure the power cord is firmly connected to both the
product and the power supply box. Plug the power cord into a grounded AC power outlet.
Note
HP does not recommend the use of uninterrupted power supply (UPS) battery backup devices or
surge suppressors with this product. Many surge suppressors and battery backups can cause print
defects.
EN
Clearing media jams 159
Improving print quality
This section provides information about identifying and correcting print defects.
Light print or fade
●
●
The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard’s media specifications (for example, the media is
page is light, the print density adjustment is too light or EconoMode might be turned on. Adjust
information.
Toner specks
●
●
The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard’s media specifications (for example, the media is
Dropouts
●
●
A single sheet of media might be defective. Try reprinting the job.
The media’s moisture content is uneven or the media has moist spots on its surface. Try
160 12 Troubleshooting printing problems
EN
●
The media lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try
a different type or brand of media.
●
●
Check Optimize for: in the Paper tab of your printer driver, and make sure it is set to the
Note
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact an HP-authorized dealer or service representative.
See the support flyer that came with your product for more information on contacting HP.
Vertical lines
●
●
Make sure that the priority input tray is in place.
The photosensitive drum inside the print cartridge has probably been scratched. Install a new
Gray background
●
●
Make sure that the priority input tray is in place.
Decrease the print density setting through HP LaserJet Device Configuration. This decreases
the amount of background shading. See the product software Help.
●
●
●
information.
Check the printer’s environment. Very dry (low humidity) conditions can increase the amount
of background shading.
EN
Improving print quality 161
Toner smear
●
●
The fuser temperature might be too low. Check Optimize for: in the Paper tab of your printer
If toner smears appear on the leading edge of the media, the media guides might be dirty.
information.
●
●
Check the media type and quality.
Loose toner
●
Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab of your printer driver, and choose the media that you are
available in HP LaserJet Device Configuration. See the product software Help for details.
●
●
●
●
Plug the printer directly into an AC outlet instead of into a power strip.
Vertical repetitive defects
●
The print cartridge might be damaged. If a repetitive mark occurs at the same spot on the
162 12 Troubleshooting printing problems
EN
●
●
information. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will probably correct
itself after a few more printed pages.
Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab of your printer driver, and choose the media that you are
available in HP LaserJet Device Configuration. See the product software Help for details.
Misformed characters
●
If characters are improperly formed, producing hollow images, the media stock might be too
If characters are improperly formed, producing a wavy effect, the printer might need service. Print
improperly formed, contact an HP-authorized dealer or service representative. See the support
flyer that came with your product for more information on contacting HP.
Page skew
●
Make sure that the media is loaded correctly and the media guides are not too tight or too
information.
●
●
information.
EN
Improving print quality 163
Curl or wave
●
●
Check the media type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity cause media to curl.
The media might have been in the input tray too long. Turn over the stack of media in the tray.
Also, try rotating the media 180° in the input tray.
●
●
Open the straight-through output door and try printing straight through.
instructions. This feature is also available in HP LaserJet Device Configuration. See the
product software Help for details.
You can also adjust the fuser temperature from the product control panel. The Less Paper Curl
setting in the Service menu sets the fuser temperature to the lowest setting. Its default setting is
off. Use the instructions below to turn this setting on.
1
2
3
On the control panel, press menu/enter.
Using the < and > buttons, select Serviceand press menu/enter.
Using the < and > buttons, select Less Paper Curland press menu/enter.
Wrinkles or creases
●
more information.
●
●
●
Open the straight-through output door and try printing straight through.
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also, try rotating the media 180° in the input tray.
164 12 Troubleshooting printing problems
EN
Toner scatter outline
●
If large amounts of toner have scattered around the characters, the media might be resisting
the toner. (A small amount of toner scatter is normal for laser printing.) Try a different media
●
●
Turn over the stack of media in the tray.
Control panel error messages
Door Open or No Print Cartridge
The print cartridge door is open or there is no print cartridge in the product’s print cartridge cavity.
Make sure you have correctly installed a print cartridge into your product. For instructions on
installing the print cartridge, see Installing a print cartridge. After checking the print cartridge,
close the print cartridge door securely. When the problem is solved, the product either completes
the current job or returns to its Ready state.
Printer Tray is Empty, Add Paper
The product is out of paper. Load paper into the media input tray or the priority input tray. For
media is already loaded, remove it, check for and remove any jams, and reload the input tray.
When the problem is solved, the product either completes the current job or returns to its Ready
state.
Critical error messages
The current copying or scanning job stops and one of the following messages is displayed on the
product’s control panel:
● 50 Fuser Error
● 51 Laser Error
● 52 Scanner Error
● 57 Fan Error
● 79 Service Error
● CCD Scanner Error
● Scanner Bulb Failure
If your product displays one of these message, the product is experiencing a critical device error.
Unplug the printer for five minutes, and then plug it back in. If the error persists, contact HP
customer service at the number provided on the support flyer included with the product, or visit
http://www.hp.com.
EN
Control panel error messages 165
Alert messages
The following messages are generic alert messages that may appear in the control panel display.
● Printer Mispick (Enter) To Resume
● Printer Jam. Clear Paper Path
● Door Open Or No Print Cartridge
● Printer Tray Is Empty. Add Paper
● Document Feeder Mispick. Reload
● Doc Feeder Jam. Clear, Reload
● Memory Low. Press [Cancel]
Alert messages communicate to the user that some action must be performed, such as adding
paper or clearing a jam. When an alert message appears, the product will automatically stop the
current task, display the error message, and wait for the user to attend to the situation. Once the
user has corrected the error, the device will either complete the task or go back to the Ready state.
The exception to this rule is when the user wants to enter the main menu system. In this instance
the device will change the display and allow the user to enter the menu system.
Note
Warning messages
The following messages are generic warning messages that may appear in the control panel
display.
● Not Enough Memory. Try Later
● Device Busy. Try Again Later
● Settings Cleared
● Device Error. [Enter] To Cont.
● Page Too Complex [Enter] To Cont.
Warnings are messages that are important enough that the user must be notified. They are
transient in nature, but may affect the completion of the task or the quality of the output. When a
warning message appears, the active job might cancel. The message will display for five seconds.
If the warning messages are related to print, and the auto continue setting is on, the message will
display for 10 seconds. If there is no response from the user by either pressing enter/menu or
cancel, the device will continue processing the print job. If auto continue is off, the print related
warning messages will display until the user has either pressed enter/menu to proceed or cancel
to cancel the job.
Note
Auto continue is set in the printer driver. To find out whether auto continue is enabled, print a
166 12 Troubleshooting printing problems
EN
No copy came out
Is media loaded in the input tray?
Is the original loaded correctly?
Make sure that the original is loaded correctly:
●
●
ADF input tray: The original should be loaded top down in the ADF input tray, with the side to
Flatbed scanner: Place original document face down on the flatbed scanner with the top left
corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
Is the wrong device selected?
In HP LaserJet Copy Plus, make sure that the printer you are intending to use is selected in the
Printer field as the current device when you press start/copy.
Copies are blank, or images are missing or faded
Is the sealing tape still in the printer print cartridge?
The sealing tape might still be in the print cartridge. Remove the print cartridge, pull out the
sealing tape, and reinstall the print cartridge. See Installing a print cartridge for more information.
Is the print cartridge low on toner?
Copies are made using the printer. If the print cartridge is low on toner, the copies will be faded.
Is the original of poor quality?
The accuracy of the copy depends on the quality and size of the original. Try adjusting the contrast
is too light, the copy might not be able to compensate, even if you adjust the contrast.
Does the original have a colored background?
Colored backgrounds might cause images in the foreground to blend too much or the background
to appear in a different shade. Try using HP LaserJet Copier to adjust the settings before copying
instructions.
Improving copy quality
This section provides information on the following topics:
●
●
Preventing problems
Identifying and correcting copy/scan defects
Preventing problems
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy quality:
168 13 Troubleshooting copy problems
EN
●
Copy from the flatbed scanner. This will produce a higher quality copy than copying from the
ADF.
●
●
Use quality originals.
Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear
images and problems with the OCR application. See Installing and loading the media input
●
Open or close the straight-through output door on the product to accommodate the copy job. If
you are copying to standard weight media, use the output bin (door closed). If you are copying
to heavy media, use the straight-through output path (door open).
●
●
If your product frequently feeds more than one page at a time, replace the separation pad. For
Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.
Note
information about replacing the separation pad.
Clearing ADF media jams
To clear a media jam from the ADF
Occasionally, media becomes jammed during a copy, scan, or fax job. Some of the causes include
the following:
●
more information.
●
information.
You are notified of a media jam by an error in the software and a Document Feeder Jam
message in the control panel display.
Typical ADF jam locations
●
Input tray areas: If the page is still sticking out of the input tray, gently try to remove it from the
input tray without tearing the page. If you feel resistance, see Removing a jammed ADF page
for instructions.
●
●
Output paths: If the page is sticking out of the output bin, gently try to remove it without tearing
Intermediate location: If the page is sticking out of both the input tray and into the output area,
EN
Clearing ADF media jams 169
Removing a jammed ADF page
1
1
2
Remove the ADF input tray and open the ADF cover.
Remove the jam cleanout part. Using both hands, lift up on the two
handles until the part unsnaps. Rotate and lift out the cleanout and
set aside.
3
4
Lifting the green lever, rotate the pick mechanism until it stays open.
Gently try to remove the page without tearing it. If you feel
resistance, go to the next step.
2
5
6
Open the ADF lid and gently loosen the media using both hands.
When the media is free, gently pull it out in the direction shown.
3
4
5
6
170 13 Troubleshooting copy problems
EN
7
8
9
Close the lid to the flatbed scanner.
Lower the green lever.
7
Reinstall the cleanout by inserting it as shown. Push down on the
two tabs until the part snaps into place. It is important to install the
cleanout correctly, as future jamming might occur if the cleanout is
not properly placed.
10 Close the ADF lid and replace the ADF input tray.
8
9
10
Identifying and correcting copy defects
Vertical white or faded stripes
●
●
The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard’s media specifications (for example, the media is
EN
Identifying and correcting copy defects 171
Blank pages
●
●
●
The original might have been loaded upside down. In the ADF, load the original with the
If you are getting blank pages when scanning from the flatbed scanner, make sure the original
document is loaded correctly. Place the original document face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard’s media specifications (for example, the media is
●
●
The tape might not have been removed from the print cartridge. See HP LaserJet print
Too light or dark
●
Try adjusting the settings.
●
You might need to change the properties settings for the associated function in HP LaserJet
Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager. See the product software Help for details.
Unwanted lines
●
●
●
Make sure the priority input tray is in place.
The photosensitive drum inside the print cartridge may have been scratched. Install a new HP
Black dots or streaks
●
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the ADF or flatbed scanner.
Unclear text
●
Try adjusting the settings.
●
You might need to change the properties settings for the associated function in HP LaserJet
Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager. See the product software Help for details.
172 13 Troubleshooting copy problems
EN
174 13 Troubleshooting copy problems
EN
Scanned image is of poor quality
Is the original a second generation photo or picture?
Reprinted photographs, such as those in newspapers or magazines, are printed using tiny dots of
ink that make an interpretation of the original photograph, which dramatically decreases the
quality. Often, the ink dots form unwanted patterns that, when scanned and reprinted or displayed,
can be detected. If the following suggestions do not solve your problem, you might need to use a
better quality version of the original.
●
●
●
Print the scanned image to see if the quality is better.
Make sure that your resolution and color settings are correct for the type of scan job that you
●
For best results, use the flatbed scanner, not the ADF, for scanning.
Is the image quality better when printed?
The image displayed on the screen is not always an accurate representation of the quality of the
scan.
●
Try adjusting the settings on your computer monitor to display more colors (or levels of gray).
Typically, you make this adjustment by selecting Display, found on the Windows Control Panel.
●
Is the image skewed (crooked)?
The original might have been loaded incorrectly. It is important to use the media guides when you
Does the scanned image have blots, lines, vertical white stripes, or any
other defect?
Is the scanner dirty?
Do graphics appear different from the original?
The graphics settings might not be suitable for the type of scan job that you are performing. Try
Part of the image did not scan or text is missing
Was the original loaded correctly?
instructions.
176 14 Troubleshooting scanning problems
EN
Does the original have a colored background?
Colored backgrounds can cause images in the foreground to blend too much. Try adjusting the
settings before you scan the original or enhancing the image after you scan the original. See
Is the original longer than 381 mm (15 inches)?
The maximum scannable length is 381 mm (15 inches) using the ADF. If the page exceeds the
maximum length, the scanner stops. Copies can be longer.
CAUTION
Do not try to pull the original from the ADF; you might damage the scanner or your original. See
Is the original too small?
The minimum size supported in the ADF for the HP LaserJet 3300 is 127 by 127 mm (5 by 5
Are you using HP LaserJet Director?
Your default property settings for HP LaserJet Director might be set to automatically perform a
specific task other than the one you are attempting. For example, you can set HP LaserJet
Director to automatically perform a scan to e-mail. This means that your image does not show up
on the screen but is attached to an e-mail message as a file. See the product software Help for
instructions on changing the properties in HP LaserJet Director.
Is the paper size correct?
In Scan settings (in the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer), make sure that the input paper size is
large enough for the document that you are scanning.
Did you check for missing text in selected regions?
Scan your document in page-by-page mode and make sure that missing text is in a selected
region. If you are performing an OCR operation on a document, colored text does not scan well, if
at all.
The text cannot be edited
Is the product software set to edit text (OCR)?
Text remains as a single image until the Optical Character Recognition (OCR) application converts
Was the original loaded correctly?
For OCR, the original must be loaded top forward and face up into the ADF. If using the flatbed
scanner, make sure to load originals correctly. Place the original document face down on the
flatbed scanner with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the
glass.
Are you using the correct word processing application?
Your OCR application might be linked to a word processing application that does not perform OCR
tasks. See the product software Help for more information about linking applications.
EN
The text cannot be edited 177
Does the original have tightly spaced text?
●
The OCR application might not recognize text that is tightly spaced. For example, if the text
that the OCR application converts has missing or combined characters, rn might appear as m.
●
Text may be classified as a graphic and therefore not converted to text.
Is the original of poor quality?
The accuracy of the OCR application depends on the image quality, text size, and structure of the
original and the quality of the scan itself. Make sure that your original has good image quality.
Does the original have a colored background?
Colored backgrounds can cause images in the foreground to blend too much. Try adjusting the
settings before you scan the original or enhancing the image after you scan the original. See
document, colored text does not scan well, if at all.
The scan takes too long
Is your resolution or color level set too high?
If you set the resolution and color level too high, the scan job takes longer and results in larger
files. To obtain good results when scanning or copying, it is important that you use the correct
information.
Is your software set to scan in color?
Your system defaults to color, which takes longer to scan even if you are scanning a monochrome
original. If you acquire an image through TWAIN, you can change the settings to scan in
grayscale. See the product software Help for details.
Did you send a print or copy job before you tried to scan?
If you sent a print or copy job before you tried to scan, the scan will start if the scanner is not busy.
However, the printer and scanner share memory, which means that the scan might be slower.
Is your computer set for bi-directional communication?
See the documentation that came with your computer to change the BIOS settings. The
recommended bi-directional setting for the parallel port is ECP. USB is always bi-directional.
Error messages appear on the screen
Unable to activate TWAIN source
If you are acquiring an image from another device, such as a digital camera or another scanner,
make sure that the other device is TWAIN compliant. Non-TWAIN-compliant devices do not work
with the HP LaserJet 3300 product software.
Make sure that you have connected the USB or parallel cable to the correct port on the back of
your computer. If you have another port, try attaching the cable to the other port. Make sure that
you have an SPP-(bidirectional) or ECP-compliant parallel port on your computer. An SPP parallel
port is the minimum; an ECP parallel port is strongly recommended. See the documentation that
came with your computer for more information about your port.
178 14 Troubleshooting scanning problems
EN
Some devices might not share the parallel port with the printer. If you have an external hard drive,
or network switchbox connected to the same USB or parallel port as the HP LaserJet 3300, the
other device might be interfering. To connect and use the HP LaserJet 3300, you must disconnect
the other device or you must use two ports on the computer. You might need to add another
parallel interface card. Hewlett-Packard strongly recommends an ECP parallel interface card. See
the documentation that came with your computer for more information about installing an
additional parallel interface card or resolving device conflicts.
Verify that the correct TWAIN source is selected. In the software, check the TWAIN source by
selecting Select Scanner from the File menu.
The scanner did nothing
Is the original loaded correctly?
Make sure that the original is loaded correctly:
●
●
Flatbed scanner: Place the original document face down on the flatbed scanner with the top
left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
Improving scan quality
This section provides information on the following topics:
●
●
Preventing problems
Identifying and correcting scan defects
Preventing problems
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy and scan quality:
●
●
●
Use the flatbed scanner, rather than the ADF, to scan.
Use quality originals.
Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear
images and problems with the OCR application. See Installing and loading the media input
●
●
Open or close the straight-through output door on the product to accommodate the copy job. If
you are copying to standard weight media, use the output bin (door closed). If you are copying
to heavy media, use the straight-through output path (door open).
Adjust the software settings according to how you plan to use the scanned page. See
●
●
If your product frequently feeds more than one page at a time, replace the separation pad. For
●
Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.
EN
The scanner did nothing 179
Identifying and correcting scan defects
Blank pages
●
The original might have been loaded upside down. In the ADF, put the top end of the original
media stack into the ADF input tray, with the media stack face up and the first page to be
●
If you are getting blank pages when scanning from the flatbed, make sure the original
document is loaded correctly. Place the original document face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
Too light or dark
●
Try adjusting the settings.
●
You might need to change the properties settings for the associated function in HP LaserJet
Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager. See the product software Help for details.
Unwanted lines
●
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the scanner. Try cleaning the
Black dots or streaks
●
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the scanner surface. Try
Unclear text
●
Try adjusting the settings.
●
You might need to change the properties settings for the associated function in HP LaserJet
Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager. See the product software Help for details.
Reduced size
●
The HP software settings might be set to reduce the scanned image. See the product software
Help for more information about changing the settings in HP LaserJet Director and HP
LaserJet Document Manager.
180 14 Troubleshooting scanning problems
EN
Fax phone problems
Use the following checklist to help you define what is causing any faxing problems you might be
encountering.
Are you using the phone cord supplied with the product?
This product has been tested with the supplied phone cord to meet RJ11 specifications.
Is the fax/phone line connector installed in the correct socket on the
product?
It should be plugged into the product’s line socket (the socket on top with an “L” next to it). You
must open the left side panel to access the socket. See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in
the fax guide that came with your product for details.
Is the fax/phone line connector seated into the socket on the product?
Gently pull on the Fax/Phone line connector to make sure it is well seated into the socket.
Is the phone wall jack working properly?
Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the wall jack.
Can you hear a dial tone and can you make a phone call?
Attach a phone to the wall jack and verify that there is a dial tone and that you can make a phone
call.
What type of phone line are you using?
Dedicated line: A unique fax/phone number assigned to receive or send faxes. The phone cord
should be connected to the top port inside the left side panel of the product (the one that is not
labeled with a telephone icon).
Shared phone line: A system where both phone calls and faxes are received or sent using the
same phone number and phone line. A single standard phone line can only perform one function
at a time. You cannot send a fax while talking on the phone or while connecting to the Internet
using the same phone line.
PBX system: A business environment phone system. Standard home phones and the HP
LaserJet 3330 use an analog phone signal. PBX systems are digital and are incompatible with
standard phones and with devices such as the HP LaserJet 3330. You need to have access to a
standard analog phone line in order to send and receive faxes.
Roll-over lines: A phone system feature where, when one incoming line is busy, the next call
“rolls over” to the next available line. Try attaching the product to the first incoming phone line. The
product will answer the phone after it rings the number of times set in the product’s
Distinctive ring service: The phone company can assign two phone numbers to one physical
line and assign each number a distinctive ring pattern. Make sure the product is set to respond to
the correct distinctive ring pattern assigned to the fax phone number by your phone service
182 15 Troubleshooting faxing problems
EN
Are you using a phone line splitter?
A phone line splitter is a device used to split out two or more phone line jacks to connect phones or
devices to the same phone line wall jack. Confusion can result from the existence of two different
kinds of splitters.
Parallel splitters (also called “T” splitters) split a single line into two jacks, allowing two devices to
be plugged into the same line.
Line1/Line2 splitters provide two phone line outlets from a single jack with two unique phone
numbers (two phone lines are connected to a single wall jack). A Line1/Line2 splitter must be used
if you have a fax line and a voice line coming into the same wall jack.
See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in the fax guide that came with your product for
instructions.
Note
Parallel or “T” splitters should not be used with the product, as they can degrade the quality of the
phone signal. If you need to attach a second device to the phone line along with the product, plug
the second device into the product’s “phone” socket (the socket on the bottom) inside the product’s
left side panel. See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in the fax guide that came with your
product for instructions.
Are you using a surge protection device?
This is a device used between the wall jack and the product to protect the product against
electrical power passed through the phone lines. These can cause some fax communication
problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal. If you are having problems sending or
receiving faxes and are using one of these devices, connect the product directly to the phone jack
on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge protection device.
Are you using a phone company’s voice messaging service?
This is a voice messaging service used to replace telephone answering devices. If the messaging
service’s rings-to-answer setting is lower than the product’s rings-to-answer setting, the
messaging service answers the call and the product is not able to receive faxes. If the product’s
rings-to-answer setting is lower than that of the messaging service, the product will answer all calls
and no call will ever be routed to the messaging service. The only voice messaging solution that
can be successfully used with the product is a stand-alone telephone answering machine.
Are you using an answering machine?
An answering machine should be connected directly to the port located inside the left side panel of
the product that is labeled with the telephone icon or should be shared on the same phone line
extension. Set the product’s rings-to-answer for one ring more than the number of rings for which
Note
If an answering machine is connected on the same phone line but on a different jack, it may interfere
with the product’s ability to receive faxes.
The document stops feeding during faxing
Is the document too large or too small for the ADF?
The maximum length of a page you can load is 381 mm (15 inches). Faxing of a longer page stops
at 381 mm (15 inches). The minimum page size for the ADF is 127 by 127 mm (5 by 5 inches). If
the item is too small, it can jam inside the ADF.
EN
The document stops feeding during faxing 183
If there is no jam and it has been less than one minute, wait a moment before pressing cancel. If
Are there problems with the fax machine you are sending to?
Try sending to a different fax machine.
Are there problems with the phone line?
Do one of the following:
●
●
Turn up the volume on the product and press fax/send on the control panel. If you hear a dial
tone, the phone line is working.
Disconnect the product from the phone jack and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to
make sure the phone line is working.
The product is receiving faxes but not sending them
Is your product on a PBX system?
If your product is on a PBX system, the PBX system might be generating a dial tone the product
cannot detect.
Is there a poor phone connection?
If you think there might be a poor connection on this phone line, try sending the fax later and see if
it sends successfully.
Outgoing fax calls keep dialing
The product will automatically redial a fax number if the redial on busy option is set to on. To stop
the redials while the product is dialing, press cancel. See the Changing redial settings if you need
to change the setting.
Faxes you send are not arriving
Is the receiving fax machine off or does it have an error
condition?
Call the recipient to make sure the fax machine is on and ready to receive faxes.
Is the fax still waiting in memory?
A fax might be in memory because it is waiting to redial a busy number, there are other jobs ahead
of it waiting to be sent, or the fax is set up for a delayed send. If a fax job is in memory for any of
these reasons, an entry for the job appears in the fax log. Print the fax activity log (see Printing the
184 15 Troubleshooting faxing problems
EN
All of the numbers in a long fax number cannot be dialed
The maximum number of digits or characters that can be entered into a fax number is 50. Try
Unable to start receiving faxes from an extension phone
Is the extension phone setting disabled?
Is the telephone cord securely connected?
Check that the telephone cord is securely connected between the phone and the product (or other
device connected to the product).
Press 1-2-3 in sequence, wait for three seconds, then hang up.
Voice calls are not being received by the phone or answering
machine connected to the line
Is the phone cord connected properly?
See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in the fax guide that came with the product to check
the installation. The product must be the first device connected to the phone line.
Are the answer mode and rings-to-answer settings set properly?
The rings-to-answer must be set higher than for the answering machine.
Is the answering machine or phone functioning?
Connect the phone or answering machine directly to the phone line and determine whether it
works by itself.
Incoming fax calls are not being answered
Is the answer mode set to manual?
If the answer mode is set to manual, the product never answers calls. You have to answer the
Is the rings-to-answer setting set correctly?
the fax guide that came with the product to determine which setting you need.
EN
All of the numbers in a long fax number cannot be dialed 185
Is the answer ring pattern feature turned on?
If the answer ring pattern is turned on but you do not have the service, or you do have the service
and the feature is not set correctly, this will interfere with receiving faxes. Check the answer ring
Is the phone cord connected properly?
See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in the fax guide that came with the product to check
the installation. Make sure you are using the phone cord that came with the product.
Is there a voice message being played by an answering
machine?
An answering machine voice message can interfere with the product’s ability to receive faxes.
Re-record your answering machine message, leaving at least two seconds of silence at the
beginning of the message.
Are there too many devices connected to the phone line?
Try removing the last device connected and determine whether the product works. If not, continue
removing devices one at a time and retry after removing each one.
Is the phone line working?
Do one of the following:
●
●
Turn up the volume on the product and press fax/send on the control panel. If you hear a dial
tone, the phone line is working.
Disconnect the product from the phone jack and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to
make sure the phone line is working.
Is a voice messaging service interfering with the product
answering calls?
Do one of the following:
●
●
●
Discontinue the messaging service.
Get a phone line dedicated to fax calls.
Set the product to answer in manual mode. In manual mode, you must start the fax receive
process yourself.
●
Leave the product set to automatic mode and lower the rings-to-answer for the product to a
product will answer all incoming calls.
Is the product out of paper?
If the product is out of paper and its memory is full it will not be able to receive faxes. Refill the
media input tray. The product will print all of the faxes it has saved in memory and will then resume
answering fax calls.
186 15 Troubleshooting faxing problems
EN
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly
Are you sending or receiving a very complex fax?
A complex fax, such as one with many graphics, takes longer to be sent or received.
Does the receiving fax machine have a slow modem speed?
The product only sends the fax at the fastest modem speed the receiving fax machine can use.
Is the resolution at which the fax was sent or received very high?
A higher resolution typically results in better quality, but also requires a longer transmission time. If
you are receiving the fax, call and ask the sender to lower the resolution and resend the fax.
change the default setting.
Is there a poor phone line connection?
If there is a poor phone line connection, the product and the receiving fax machine slow down the
transmission to adjust for errors. Hang up and resend the fax. If this does not work, have the
phone company check the phone line.
Faxes are not printing or are printing incorrectly
Is there media in the media input tray?
If there is no media, load the media input tray. Any faxes received while the input tray is empty are
stored in memory and will print once the tray has been refilled.
Is the receive to PC option selected?
Faxes are printing on two pages instead of one
Is the autoreduction setting set correctly?
If you want faxes to be reduced to fit on one page, the autoreduction setting should be on. If the
setting is off, faxes may print on multiple pages. See Changing autoreduction settings for incoming
Received faxes are too light or are printing only on half of the page
Did the product run out of toner while printing a fax?
The product stores up to 10 of the most recently printed faxes. As soon as possible, replace the
EN
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly 187
Troubleshooting overview
The questions below will help you troubleshoot your print server quickly. Just answer each
question in turn. Please answer the questions below in the order listed.
1
2
3
4
5
• If Yes, continue with the next question.
• If Yes, continue with the next question.
• If Yes, continue with the next question.
• If Yes, continue with the next question.
Can you print a Jetdirect configuration page?
ON and READY
The first step in troubleshooting your print server is to make sure that the attached printer is ready
to receive a print job from the print server. To do this, check the printer’s lights or control panel to
see whether it is ON and READY.
If your printer’s power is switched on and the printer is ready to print, continue with USB OK? (USB
If the printer is not ready to print, or if you are not sure what to look for, see the next topic.
Is your printer ON and READY?
Check the following items to make sure that your printer is online and ready to print.
●
Is the printer plugged in and switched on? Make sure that the printer is plugged in and
switched on. The control panel display should not be blank. If you have checked these items
and the printer still shows no sign of being on, you may have a defective power cable, power
source, or printer.
●
Is the printer ready? The display should say Ready. If it does not, check to see that there are
●
●
●
Make sure all the doors are securely closed.
If the printer display still does not say Ready, try pressing the menu/enter button.
a configuration page, you will not be able to print from your print server.
After looking through the list above and making any necessary changes, is your printer ready
now?
USB OK? (USB light ON solid green?)
The HP Jetdirect 310x print server connects to its printer using a USB cable. If the USB
connection is working correctly, the USB light on the print server will be ON solid green (bright
green in color and glowing continuously, not blinking). If the USB connection is not working
correctly, the USB light may be off, blinking green, or blinking amber.
190 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
If your print server’s USB light is not ON solid green, or if you are not sure what to look for,
continue with the following troubleshooting topics.
Note that the Jetdirect 310x print server does not support parallel-to-USB converters (for
connecting a parallel printer to a USB host)—it works with USB printers only. Make sure that the
cable is connected firmly to both the printer and the print server.
Check that both the printer and the print server are powered on.
After checking the items above and making any necessary changes, is the USB light now ON solid
green?
What is the state of the USB light?
The behavior of the USB light indicates the status of the USB connection. If the USB light on your
print server is not ON solid green, find the appropriate topic below to continue troubleshooting.
Is the USB light ON solid green?
Check the USB light on your print server. It should be ON solid green (bright green in color and
glowing continuously, not blinking). If it is not ON solid green, follow the troubleshooting steps
below.
Make sure that you have a USB cable connected between your printer and the USB port on the
print server. It should be a standard USB A-to-B cable, as shown below:
USB light OFF
If the USB light is OFF, it means that the print server’s USB connection is not operational. This is
OK before the print server finishes starting up (whether or not a USB cable is attached). If the light
remains OFF after startup, then the print server may be faulty.
Restart the print server by detaching the power cable and re-attaching it. Wait for the Power/Status
light to stop blinking (when the self-test finishes).
Is the USB light now ON solid green?
If no, your print server has a problem that requires assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support;
see the support flyer that came with your product for information on contacting HP.
USB light blinking green
If the USB light is blinking green, it indicates that the print server has detected a good connection
to a valid USB device, but the print server does not support the device. For example, this would
happen if you connected a USB digital camera to the print server.
This is not a fault, but rather an incompatibility between the print server and the connected device.
The HP Jetdirect 310x print server supports only USB printers (including USB multifunction
printers and All-in-One devices). It does not support non-printer USB devices, nor does it support
USB cable extenders, USB-to-parallel converters, or USB hubs.
Is the USB light now ON solid green?
EN
Troubleshooting overview 191
If no, but you are connected to a USB printer, your print server has a problem that requires
assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support; see the support flyer that came with your product
for information on contacting HP.
USB light blinking amber
If the USB light is blinking amber, there might be a hardware fault (for example, a short-circuit,
faulty cable, or a printer drawing too much power).
To verify, disconnect the USB cable at the print server. Switch on the printer if it is off. Power cycle
the print server (unplug it and plug it back in). Then reconnect the USB cable. If the USB light is
now green and steady, then no problem remains.
Otherwise, if the USB light is still blinking amber, there may be a faulty component. Try these steps
to determine which component might be causing the problem:
●
●
●
Detach the USB cable and power cycle the print server (unplug it and plug it back in). If the
USB LED is green and steady, the print server is OK. If it is blinking amber, the print server is
faulty.
Try reconnecting the USB cable to the print server only, and power cycle the print server
(unplug it and plug it back in). If the USB LED is green and steady, the cable is also OK. If it is
blinking amber, the cable may be faulty.
Power cycle the printer and reconnect the USB cable to the printer. If the USB LED is green
and steady, the printer is also OK. If it is blinking amber, the printer may be faulty.
Is the USB light now ON solid green?
If no, you may need to replace the component indicated at fault. If the fault is with the print server
or the USB cable (provided with the print server), get assistance from HP Jetdirect technical
support; see the support flyer that came with your product for information on contacting HP.
Power/Status OK? (Power/Status light ON solid green?)
The Power/Status light provides information on the state of the print server’s power connection
and on its physical connection to the network. If connections are working correctly, the
Power/Status light should be ON solid green (bright green in color and glowing continuously, not
blinking). If the connections are not working correctly, the Power/Status light may be off, blinking
green, or blinking amber.
If your print server’s Power/Status light is ON solid green, continue with 10/100 link OK? (10 light
If your print server’s Power/Status light is not ON solid green, or if you are not sure what to look for,
read the topics below to start evaluating the status of the print server.
Is the Power/Status light ON solid green?
Check the Power/Status light on your print server. It should be ON solid green (bright green in
color and glowing continuously, not blinking). If it is not ON solid green, please follow the
troubleshooting steps below.
For all of the steps below, note that when you first apply power to a normally operating print server,
the Power/Status light will slowly blink green for several seconds during self-test, and then go ON
solid green when the unit is ready for operation.
Note
Check that the Jetdirect power module isplugged into a suitable power source (typically a walloutlet),
and that the power connector is plugged into the print server.
192 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
If necessary, try plugging the power module into a different power source.
Try a different power module/cable if one is available.
After checking the items above and making any necessary changes, is the Power/Status light now
ON solid green?
What is the state of the Power/Status light?
The behavior of the Power/Status light indicates the status of the print server’s power connection
and its physical connection to the network. If the Power/Status light on your print server is not ON
solid green, find its state in the list below and continue troubleshooting.
Power/Status light OFF
If the Power/Status light is OFF, your power module may be faulty. Fixing this fault requires
assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support; see the support flyer that came with the product
for information on contacting HP.
Power/Status light blinking green
The Power/Status light should be ON solid green to indicate that print server power is OK and that
the network cable is connected properly to the print server. If the Power/Status light is blinking
green, please try the steps below and make changes as necessary.
Make sure that the network cable is connected securely to the print server.
Check that the network cable is plugged securely into the hub/switch/router, and that the
connection is set to the correct network speed.
●
Check that the LINK light is ON for the port on the hub/switch/router to which the print server is
connected.
●
●
Your network cable may be faulty. Try a different cable.
If the light still does not come on, try a different port on the hub/switch/router.
Is the Power/Status light now ON solid green?
If yes, continue with 10/100 link OK? (10 light or 100 light ON solid green?). If no, your print server
has a problem that requires assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support; see the support flyer
that came with your product for information on contacting HP.
Power/Status light blinking amber
Your print server has developed a fault. Fixing this fault requires assistance from HP Jetdirect
technical support; see the support flyer that came with your product for information on contacting
HP.
10/100 link OK? (10 light or 100 light ON solid green?)
The link lights, the 10 light and the 100 light, indicate whether the print server can initiate a
network link at the right speed with your hub, switch, or router. One of the link lights, either the 10
light or the 100 light, should be ON solid green (bright green in color and glowing continuously, not
blinking) to indicate a valid link with the hub/switch/router. If there is not a valid link, both the 10
and 100 lights will be off.
If neither of the print server’s link lights is ON solid green, or if you are not sure what to
look for, follow the instructions below to start evaluating the link status of the print server.
EN
Troubleshooting overview 193
Is one of the link lights ON (solid green)?
Check the link lights on your print server; these lights are built into the network connector. One of
the link lights, either the 10 light or the 100 light, but not both, should be ON solid green, to indicate
a valid network connection.
Link lights OFF
Try the steps below and make any necessary corrections.
●
●
Make sure that the network cable is connected securely to the print server.
Check that the network cable is plugged securely into the hub/switch/router, and that the
connection is set to the correct network speed. (If your hub/switch/router is set to configure its
link speed automatically, try to configure it manually for 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps only. After
changing this setting, you may need to cycle power to the print server—unplug the print
server’s power cable and then plug it in again.)
●
Check that the LINK light is ON for the port on the hub/switch/router to which the print server is
connected.
●
●
Your network cable may be faulty. Try a different cable.
If the light still does not come on, try a different port on the hub/switch/router.
Did these steps turn ON one of the link lights?
If no, your print server has a problem that requires assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support;
see the support flyer that came with your product for a list of technical support telephone numbers.
Check the print server’s I/O status
Check the I/O status of the print server by following these steps:
●
●
Print a Jetdirect configuration page. To print the page, press the test button on the print server.
getting it to print.
●
On the configuration page, check that the print server reports its status as “I/O Card Ready.”
The Status entry is the first entry in the General Information section, in the upper left portion of
Can you print a Jetdirect configuration page?
To print a configuration page, press the test button on the print server.
A configuration page should print on the connected printer. This page displays information about
the print server hardware, the firmware version, the hardware (MAC) address, the connected
printer, network connectivity, network traffic, and network protocols. See Interpreting the
Configuration page prints?
The Jetdirect configuration page is a page that the print server sends to the attached printer, both
as a test of the connection between the print server and the printer, and as a display of the status
configuration page contents.
194 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
If you are able to print a Jetdirect configuration page on your printer, continue with the instructions
Configuration page does not print
If the configuration page does not print, try these steps:
1
Make sure your printer is connected to your print server by a USB A-to-B cable. (This is the
standard USB cable.)
Note
Note that the HP Jetdirect 310x print server does not support parallel-to-USB converters (for
connecting a parallel printer to a USB host)—it works with USB printers only. Make sure that the
cable is connected firmly to both the printer and the print server.
2
3
4
Make sure that the printer and the print server are powered on.
Make sure that the printer is Ready.
You can check whether the print server is sending the page in a printer language (PDL) that
the printer supports. If the language is not supported by the printer, the page will not print or
will be unreadable if it does print.
By default, the print server is configured to determine the appropriate printer language
automatically. It is possible that the print server is not able to determine automatically which
language it should use for your printer.
You can cycle through the four printer languages using the following procedure:
a
Press and hold the print server’s Test button. After about three seconds, the power/status
LED changes to amber. Continue to hold the button until the power/status LED is flashing
green. Then release the button.
b
c
Briefly press and release the test button once again to request the configuration page in
the next language.
Verify that a readable page is printed. Repeat these steps up to four times if necessary to
receive a configuration page you can read.
5
6
If you cannot read the page, refer to your printer documentation to find out which of the
following four printer languages are supported by your printer:
• ASCII
• PCL
• PostScript
• HP/GL-2
It may be necessary to re-initialize the connection between the printer and the print server by
cycling power on the print server. (Unplug the power cable from the print server; then plug it
back in.) Do this with the printer switched ON.
Error messages
If your configuration page shows a status of “I/O Card Not Ready,” you will see a specific error
message just below the status line. This error message indicates what is preventing the print
server from functioning correctly.
From the list below, find the error message that you see on the configuration page. The
instructions in the next few topics give a fuller explanation of each error.
EN
Configuration page does not print 195
●
●
●
●
●
03 LAN Error: EXTERNAL LOOPBACK
08 LAN Error: INFINITE DEFERRAL
11 LAN Error: RETRY FAULTS
12 LAN Error: NO LINKBEAT
Other Error: If the error that you see on the configuration page is not listed above, your
problem requires assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
03 LAN Error: EXTERNAL LOOPBACK
The print server is incorrectly connected to the network or is defective.
Make sure that your print server is correctly attached to your network. In addition, check all other
cabling and connectors.
For help in correcting this error, contact HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
08 LAN Error: INFINITE DEFERRAL
There is a network congestion problem.
For help in correcting this error, contact HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
11 LAN Error: RETRY FAULTS
There is a problem with your network cabling or with your external network configuration.
Verify that your hub/switch/router port is operating correctly.
For help in correcting this error, contact HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
12 LAN Error: NO LINKBEAT
When the print server is connected to a 10/100 Base-Tx port, this message is displayed if the Link
Beat signal is not sensed.
Check the network cable, and verify that the hub/switch/router is providing Link Beat.
For help in correcting this error, contact HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
Resetting the 310x print server to factory defaults (cold reset)
Once you configure the print server, the configuration settings are retained in memory unless you
manually reset them to factory defaults.
To reset the HP Jetdirect 310x print server configuration to factory defaults, follow these steps:
1
2
Unplug the power cable from the back of the print server.
While holding down the test button on the rear end of the print server, plug the power cable
back into the print server and continue to hold down the test button for about five seconds. Any
user-configured settings will be erased.
196 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
Interpreting the configuration page
The configuration page (also called a self-test page or configuration plot) for a print server displays
messages, network statistics, and status for the print server. To print a configuration page, briefly
press the test button on the print server.
An HP Jetdirect configuration page can also be viewed over the network from a management
utility (such as HP Web JetAdmin), or by accessing the embedded web server on the print server.
EN
Interpreting the configuration page 197
General information
Provides general print server status and identification information.
Message
Description
Current state of the print server.
Status
● I/O Card Ready the print server has successfully connected to the
network and is awaiting data.
● I/O Card Initializing the print server is initializing the network
protocols. For more information, see the status line for each protocol on
the configuration page.
● I/O Card Not Ready there is a problem with the print server or its
configuration.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Model Number
The model number of the HP print server (for example, J6038A).
Hardware Address
The 12-digit hexadecimal LAN hardware (MAC) address of the print server
installed in or attached to the printing device. This address is assigned by
the manufacturer.
Firmware Version
Port Select
The firmware revision number of the print server currently installed in the
printer. The format is X.NN.NN, where X is a letter that depends on the print
server model.
Specifies the LAN port on the print server that has been detected for use:
● None the print server is not connected to the network.
● RJ-45 the RJ-45 network port is connected.
Port Config
Identifies the link configuration of the RJ-45 LAN port on the print server:
● 10BASE-T HALF 10 Mbps, half-duplex.
● 10BASE-T FULL 10 Mbps, full-duplex.
● 100TX HALF 100 Mbps, half-duplex.
● 100TX FULL 100 Mbps, full-duplex.
● Unknown the print server is in an initialization state.
● Disconnected a network connection has not been detected. Check
network cables.
Auto Negotiation
Identifies whether IEEE 802.3u Autonegotiation on the 10/100Tx port is
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
On: the print server will attempt to automatically configure itself onto the
network at the proper speed (10 or 100 Mbps) and mode (half or full
duplex).
Manufacturing ID
Date Manufactured
The manufacturing identification code for use by HP Customer Care
personnel.
Identifies the date of manufacture of the HP Jetdirect print server.
198 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
Message
Description
SNMP Set Cmty Name
Specifies whether an SNMP set community name has been configured on
the print server. An SNMP set community name is a password for “write”
access to SNMP control functions (SNMP SetRequests) on the print server.
● Not Specified an SNMP set community name has not been set.
● Specified a specific SNMP set community name has been set.
USB Printer 1
Heads the section for the USB printer class descriptor information supplied
by the manufacturer of the printing device. The configuration and diagnostic
pages will be printed on the printing device attached to the print server.
USB port information
Provides the USB printer class descriptors for the device connected to the port.
Message
Description
Device Name
Name of the attached USB printing device, supplied by the manufacturer.
Manufacturer of the attached printing device.
Serial number of the attached printing device.
Manufacturer
Serial Number
Communication Mode
Current USB communication mode:
● 1284.4 IEEE standard protocol, a mode for printers and multifunction
(All-in-One) devices that allows multiple channels of simultaneous print,
scan, and status communication.
● MLC HP-proprietary protocol for Multiple Logical Channels, a mode for
printers and multifunction (All-in-One) devices that allows multiple
channels of simultaneous print, scan, and status communication.
● Bidirectional two-way printer communication, sending print data
to the printing device and returning status information from the printing
device.
● Unidirectional one-way printer communication from computer to
printing device.
● Device not found connection of a printing device has not been
detected. Check device and cable.
● Device not supported the device connected is not a printer (for
example, a camera).
Network statistics
Provides the current values for various network parameters monitored by the print server.
Message Description
Total Packets Received Total number of frames (packets) received by the print server without error.
This includes broadcast, multicast packets, and packets specifically
addressed to the print server. This number does not include packets
specifically addressed to other nodes.
EN
Interpreting the configuration page 199
Message
Description
Unicast Packets
Received
Number of frames specifically addressed to this print server. This does not
include broadcasts or multicasts.
Bad Packets Received
Total number of frames (packets) received with errors by the print server.
Framing Errors
Received
Maximum of CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) errors and framing errors.
CRC errors are frames received with CRC errors. Framing errors are
frames received with alignment errors. A large number of framing errors
could indicate a cabling problem with your network.
Total Packets
Transmitted
Total number of frames (packets) transmitted without error.
Unsendable Packets
Transmit Collisions
Total number of frames (packets) not successfully transmitted because of
errors.
Number of frames not transmitted because of repeated collisions.
Transmit Late
Collisions
Total number of frames not transmitted because a late collision occurred. A
large number may indicate a cabling problem on the network.
TCP/IP protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the TCP/IP network protocols.
Message
Description
Status
Current TCP status:
● Ready the print server is awaiting data over TCP/IP.
● Disabled TCP/IP was manually disabled.
● Initializing the print server is searching for the BOOTP server, or
trying to get the configuration file through TFTP. An additional status
message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Host Name
The host name configured on the print server. It may be truncated.
● Not Specified no host name was specified in a BOOTP response
or TFTP configuration file.
● NPIxxxxxx the default name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx represents
the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
IP Address
The Internet Protocol (IP) address assigned to the print server. This is a
required entry for its operation on a TCP/IP network. During initialization, a
temporary value 0.0.0.0 is displayed. After two minutes, a default IP
address 192.0.0.192 is assigned, which may not be a valid IP address for
your network.
● Not Specified an IP address is not assigned or the value is zero.
200 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
Message
Description
Subnet Mask
The IP subnet mask configured on the print server. During initialization, a
temporary value 0.0.0.0 is displayed. Depending on configuration
parameters, the print server may automatically assign a usable default
value.
● Not Specified a subnet mask is not configured.
Default Gateway
The IP address of the gateway used when sending packets off the local
network. Only one default gateway may be configured. During initialization,
a temporary value 0.0.0.0 is displayed. If not provided, the IP address of the
print server is used.
● Not Specified a default gateway is not configured.
Config By
Identifies how the print server obtained its IP configuration.
● BOOTP automatic configuration via a BOOTP server.
● BOOTP/TFTP automatic configuration via a BOOTP server and TFTP
configuration file.
● DHCP automatic configuration via a DHCP server.
● DHCP/TFTP automatic configuration via a DHCP server and TFTP
configuration file.
● RARP automatic configuration via the Reverse Address Resolution
Protocol.
● User Specified manual configuration via Telnet, the printer’s
control panel, HP Web JetAdmin, embedded web server, or other
method.
● Default IP the default IP address was assigned. This address may
not be a valid address for your network.
● Not Configured the print server was not configured with IP
parameters. Verify that TCP/IP is enabled, or check for error status.
BOOTP Server
or
DHCP Server
or
RARP Server
Displayed if BOOTP, DHCP, or RARP is used for TCP/IP configuration. It
specifies the IP address of the system that responds to the print server’s
request for automatic TCP/IP configuration over the network.
● Not Specified the configuration server’s IP address could not be
determined or was set to zero in the response packet.
BOOTP/DHCP Server
Displayed during initialization while the print server attempts to obtain its
TCP/IP configuration from a BOOTP or DHCP server. The temporary
address displayed is 0.0.0.0.
● Not Specified the configuration server’s IP address could not be
determined or was set to zero in the response packet.
TFTP Server
Config File
The IP address of the system where the TFTP configuration file is located.
During initialization, the temporary address 0.0.0.0 is displayed.
● Not Specified a TFTP server has not been set.
The name of the print server's configuration file. The file pathname may be
truncated to fit on two lines.
● Not Specified a file was not specified in the BOOTP reply from the
host.
EN
Interpreting the configuration page 201
Message
Description
Domain Name
The Domain Name System (DNS) name of the domain in which the print
server resides (for example, support.company.com). It is not the fully
qualified DNS name because the host printer name is not included (for
example: printer1.support.company.com).
● Not Specified a domain name has not been configured on the
print server.
DNS Server
The IP address of the Domain Name System (DNS) server.
● Not Specified a DNS server's IP address has not been configured
on the print server.
WINS Server
The IP address of the Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) server.
● Not Specified a WINS server's IP address has not been
configured on the print server.
Syslog Server
Idle Timeout
The IP address of the syslog server configured on the print server.
● Not Specified a syslog server has not been configured.
The timeout value expressed in seconds after which the print server closes
an idle TCP print data connection. Acceptable values are integers between
0 and 3600 seconds. A value of zero turns off the timeout mechanism. The
default value is 270 seconds.
SLP
Specifies whether the print server sends Service Location Protocol (SLP)
packets used by system applications for automated installation.
● Enabled the print server sends SLP packets.
● Disabled the print server does not send SLP packets.
Access List
Identifies whether a host access control list is configured on the print
server. A host access control list specifies the IP address of individual
systems, or IP network of systems, that are allowed access to the print
server and device.
● Specified a host access list is configured on the print server.
● Not Specified a host access list is not configured on the print
server. All systems are allowed access.
Web JetAdmin URL
If the print server is found on the network by HP Web JetAdmin, the URL of
the host system used for HP Web JetAdmin services is displayed. The URL
is limited to two lines and may be truncated.
● Not Specified the URL of the HP Web JetAdmin host system could
not be identified or is not configured.
202 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
IPX/SPX protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the IPX/SPX network protocols.
Message
Description
Status
Indicates the current IPX/SPX protocol status.
● Ready the print server is awaiting data over IPX/SPX.
● Disabled IPX/SPX was manually disabled.
● Initializing the print server is registering the node address or
name. An additional status message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Primary Frame Type
Specifies the frame type selection on the print server.
● Auto Select the print server automatically senses and limits the
frame type to the first one detected.
● EN_II limits the frame type to IPX over Ethernet frames. All others will
be counted and discarded.
● EN_802.2 limits the frame type to IPX over IEEE 802.2 with IEEE
802.3 frames. All others will be counted and discarded.
● EN_SNAP limits the frame type to IPX over SNAP with IEEE 802.3
frames. All others will be counted and discarded.
● EN_802.3 limits the frame type to IPX over IEEE 802.3 frames. All
others will be counted and discarded.
Network
The first column headed Network indicates the network number associated
with each protocol frame type used for communication between a server
and the print server.
● Unknown the print server is still trying to determine which network
number to use.
Frame Type
EN_II
The second column headed Frame Type identifies the frame type
associated with each network number.
EN_802.2
EN_SNAP
EN_802.3
Unless a specific frame type has been manually configured, the print server
automatically determines the protocol frame type by listening to the network
data being transferred over the network.
● Disabled a specific frame type for that network has been manually
configured.
Rcvd
The third column headed Rcvd indicates how many packets have been
received for each frame type.
EN
Interpreting the configuration page 203
Novell/NetWare protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the Novell NetWare network protocol.
Message
Description
Status
Indicates the current NetWare configuration status.
● Ready the print server is awaiting data.
● Disabled IPX/SPX was manually disabled.
● Initializing the print server is registering the node address or
name. An additional status message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Node Name
In Queue Server Mode (see below), this is the IPX/SPX name of the print
server. It must match a valid print server on the appropriate NetWare file
server. The default name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of
the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
In Remote Printer Mode (see below), this is the name specified when you
configured the networked printer. The default name is NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
NetWare Mode
The NetWare mode used by the print server:
● Queue Server indicates that the print server receives data directly
from the queue. It is also used when the printer is not configured.
● Remote Printer with the printer number following it, indicates that
the print server emulates a Novell NetWare remote printer.
NDS Tree Name
NDS Context:
Displays the name of the Novell Directory Services (NDS) tree for this
printer. NDS is a database of objects on a NetWare network, organized in a
heierarchical tree structure.
● Not Specifiedor missing: NDS is disabled.
Displays the fully qualified NDS name where the print server object resides
in the NDS tree. For example:
CN=lj_pserver.OU=support.OU=mycity.OU=mycompany
● Not Specifiedor missing: NDS is disabled.
Attached Server
Identifies the Jetdirect discovery method NSG (Nearest Service Query) or
GSQ (General Service Query) and the name of the proxy file server used to
locate the configured bindery servers.
● Not Specifiedor missing: A NetWare server has not been
configured.
Queue Poll Interval
SAP Interval
Server x
This job poll interval specifies the time interval (in seconds) that the print
server waits to check for print jobs in a print queue. The default is two
seconds.
Specifies the time interval (in seconds) that the print server waits between
Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) broadcasts on the network. The default
is 60 seconds.
x identifies a NetWare file server to which the print server is attached.
204 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
AppleTalk protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the AppleTalk network protocol.
Message
Description
Status
Indicates the current AppleTalk configuration status.
● Ready the print server is awaiting data.
● Disabled AppleTalk was manually disabled.
● Initializing the print server is registering the node address or
name. An additional status message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Name
The name of the printer on the AppleTalk network. A number after the name
indicates that there are multiple devices with this name, and this is the Nth
instance of the name.
Zone
Type
The name of the AppleTalk network zone on which the printer is located.
The type of the printer being advertised on the network. Two types can be
displayed.
Network Number
Node Number
The AppleTalk Network Number on which the print server is currently
operating.
The AppleTalk Node Number that the print server chose for itself as part of
its initialization sequence.
Note: The AppleTalk phase 2 (P2) parameter is preconfigured on the print
server.
DLC/LLC protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the DLC/LLC network protocol.
Message
Description
Status
Indicates the current DLC/LLC configuration status.
● Ready the print server is awaiting data.
● Disabled DLC/LLC was manually disabled.
● Initializing the print server is registering the node address or
name. An additional status message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
EN
Interpreting the configuration page 205
Error messages
Error Code and Message Description
02
During self-test, the print server detected an internal loopback test error.
LAN ERROR- INTERNAL
LOOPBACK
The print server may be faulty. If the error persists, replace the print server.
03
The print server is incorrectly connected to your network or is defective.
Make sure your print server is correctly attached to your network. In
addition, check the cabling and connectors.
LAN ERROR- EXTERNAL
LOOPBACK
07
Check the network connections. If the connections are intact, run the
LAN ERROR- CONTROLLER power-on self-test: turn the printer off, then on again. If the error persists,
CHIP
replace the print server.
08
There is a network congestion problem.
LAN ERROR- INFINITE
DEFERRAL
Note: If the print server is not connected to the network, this error cannot
occur.
09
Check the network connections. If the connections are intact, run the
power-on self-test: turn the printer off, then on again. If the error persists,
replace the print server.
LAN ERROR- BABBLE
0A
Check the network connections. If the connections are intact, run the
power-on self-test: turn the printer off, then on again. If the error persists,
replace the print server.
LAN ERROR- NOSQE
0C
There may be a problem with your network cabling or the print server.
Check the cabling and connectors on your Ethernet network. If you cannot
find a problem with your network cabling, run the power-on self-test:
remove and re-attach the power module connector on the print server. If the
error persists, there is a problem with the print server.
LAN ERROR- RECEIVER
OFF
0D
There may be a problem with your network cabling or the print server.
LAN ERROR- TRANSMITTER Check the cabling and connectors on your Ethernet network. If you cannot
OFF
find a problem with your network cabling, run the power-on self-test:
remove and re-attach the power module connector on the print server. If the
error persists, there is a problem with the print server.
0E
Check the network connections. If the connections are intact, run the
power-on self-test: remove and re-attach the power module connector on
the print server. If the error persists, replace the print server.
LAN ERROR- LOSS OF
CARRIER
10
There may be a problem with your network cabling or the print server.
Check the cabling and connectors on your network. If you cannot find a
problem with your network cabling, run the power-on self-test: remove and
re-attach the power module connector on the print server. If the error
persists, there is a problem with the print server.
LAN ERROR- UNDERFLOW
11
There is a problem with your network cabling or external network
configuration. Verify operation of the hub or switch port.
LAN ERROR- RETRY
FAULTS
206 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
Error Code and Message Description
12
With a 10/100Base-Tx port connected, Link Beat is not sensed. Check the
LAN ERROR- NO LINKBEAT network cable, and verify that the concentrator or hub is providing Link
Beat.
13
Reset or power cycle the print server to enable the new configuration
NETWORK RECONFIG- MUST values.
REBOOT
15
The configuration information for the NetWare functions is not stored
CONFIGURATION ERROR
correctly on the print server. Use the installation software, embedded web
server, or other tools to reconfigure the print server. If this error persists,
there may be a problem with the print server.
16
The print server has not been configured for NetWare. Use the installation
software, embedded web server, or other tools to configure the print server
for NetWare networks.
NOT CONFIGURED
17
The print server was unable to find the NetWare print server (in Remote
UNABLE TO FIND SERVER Printer mode) or file server (in Queue Server mode). There was no
response to service queries for advertising print servers or file servers that
matched the configured print server or file server name.
Make sure that the print server or file server is running and that the print
server or file server name configured on the print server matches the actual
name used by the print server or file server. Also make sure that all cables
and routers are functioning correctly.
18
The print server detected that the password for the NetWare print server
object is wrong. Use a NetWare utility (such as PCONSOLE) to erase the
password for the print server object. When the print server logs on again, it
sets a new password.
PASSWORD ERROR
Note: When multiple file servers are configured, the error is only displayed
on the configuration page if none of the file servers are connected.
19
The HP Jetdirect print server detected that the print server object has not
been assigned any queues to service. Assign queues to the print server
object using printer installation or NetWare utilities.
NO QUEUE ASSIGNED
Note: When multiple file servers are configured, the error is only displayed
on the configuration page if none of the file servers was successfully
connected.
1A
A NetWare printer number for this printer has not been configured. Assign a
valid printer number to the print server. Use a NetWare utility (such as
PCONSOLE), the Jetdirect embedded web server, or another tool to assign
a printer number.
PRINTER NUMBER NOT
DEFINED
1B
The NetWare printer number assigned to the printer is already in use by
PRINTER NUMBER IN USE another printer. Assign an unused printer number. This may also occur
when a printer is power cycled, in which case the error goes away after the
print server times out and detects the lost connection.
EN
Interpreting the configuration page 207
Error Code and Message Description
1C
The file server does not have a print server object that corresponds to the
PRINT SERVER NO
DEFINED
specified NetWare node name. Use printer installation software, a NetWare
utility (such as PCONSOLE), or another tool to create the print server
object.
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
1D
Remote Printer mode error. The print server was unable to establish an
SPX connection with the NetWare print server. Make sure that the NetWare
print server is running and that all cables and routers are functioning
correctly.
UNABLE TO CONNECT TO
SERVER
1E
The SPX connection to the print server was lost when the print server
FAIL RESERVING PRINTER attempted to reserve the printer number. This indicates a possible network
NUM
problem, or a problem with the print server. Make sure all cables and
routers are functioning correctly. Try restarting the print server.
1F
A failure was detected when selecting the buffer size to be used when
ERR NEGOTIATING BUFFER reading print data from the file server. This may indicate a network problem.
SIZE
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
20
A failure was detected when the print server tried to log onto the file server.
This could be caused by the print server object not existing on the file
server, or by a security check that prevents the print server from logging in.
Make sure the file server name and print server object name are correct.
Use PCONSOLE to erase the password for the print server object. Create a
new print server object.
UNABLE TO LOGIN
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
21
A failure was detected when the print server tried to set the password for
UNABLE TO SET PASSWORD the print server object. (Whenever the print server is able to log in without a
password, it sets the password automatically.) This indicates a networking
or security problem. Create a new print server object.
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
22
Queue Server mode error. The print server could not establish an NCP
connection to the file server. Make sure that the correct file servers are
connected.
UNABLE TO CONNECT TO
SERVER
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
208 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
Error Code and Message Description
23
A failure was detected when the print server tried to attach to one of the
UNABLE TO ATTACH TO
QUEUE
queues assigned to the print server object. This may be because no
servers are allowed to attach to this queue. There may also be a networking
or security problem. Use PCONSOLE to make sure that servers are
allowed to attach to the queue, to delete the print server object from the list
of queue servers if you want the print server to service other queues, or to
delete the queue and create a new one (the print server object must be
added to the list of queue servers).
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
24
The NetWare print server requested a termination of the connection with
the print server. No error exists or is indicated. Make sure the NetWare print
server is running, and restart it if necessary.
PSERVER CLOSED
CONNECTION
25
The SPX connection to the print server was lost after the connection had
been made. This indicates a possible network problem, or a problem with
the print server. Make sure all cables and routers are functioning correctly.
Try restarting the print server.
DISCONNECTING - SPX
TIMEOUT
26
The print server encountered an unexpected fatal error after it had
successfully connected to the file server. A wide variety of failures could
produce this error message, including a downed file server or a network
router failure.
UNKNOWN NCP RETURN
CODE
27
The print server sent some data when the print server had not given its
permission to do so. This indicates a possible print server problem, possibly
a software problem.
UNEXPECTED PSERVER
DATA RCVD
28
The print server was unable to allocate a buffer from its internal memory.
This indicates all buffers are busy due possibly to heavy broadcast traffic or
large amounts of network traffic directed to the print server.
OUT OF BUFFERS
29
The print server has been trying for more than three minutes to determine
the NetWare protocol used on the network. Make sure that any file servers
and routers are operating correctly. Make sure that the settings for NetWare
frame type and source routing are correct.
UNABLE TO SENSE NET
NUMBER
2A
More queues were assigned than the print server can handle. Remove one
or more print queues from the list to be serviced by Queue Server Mode.
NDS ERR: EXCEEDS MAX
SERVERS
2B
Unable to log onto the NetWare directory tree. Make sure that the print
server object is defined in the directory at the correct context. Clear the
print server password using NWADMIN or similar NetWare tool.
NDS ERR: UNABLE TO
LOGIN
2C
Unable to log onto the NetWare directory tree. Make sure that the print
server object is defined in the directory at the correct context.
AUTHENTICATION ERROR
EN
Interpreting the configuration page 209
Error Code and Message Description
2D
Cannot modify the print server password to the value expected by the print
NDS ERR: CHANGE PSSWRD server.
FAILED
2E
Print Server Object Name mismatch. Unable to read the file server’s public
NDS SERVER PUBLIC KEY key. Verify object names, or contact the NDS administrator.
ERROR
2F
The file server on the network cannot be located. The server may not be
running at this time or a communications problem may exist.
NDS ERR: SRVR NAME
UNRESOLVD
30
The print server object cannot be located in the specified NDS context.
NDS PRINT SERVER NAME
ERROR
31
Cannot locate a list of printer objects that should be assigned to the print
server object.
NDS PS PRINTER LIST
ERROR
32
The list of notification objects assigned to the printer object cannot be
NDS PRINTER OBJ NOTIFY located.
ERR
33
The list of print queues assigned to the printer objects cannot be located.
NDS PRINT OBJ QUEUE
LIST ERR
34
The printer object cannot be located in the NDS directory.
The current version of the NetWare file server is not supported.
NDS ERR: UNRESOLVD
PRNTR OBJ
35
NDS ERR: INVALID SRVR
VERS
36
No printer objects are assigned to the print server object configured to this
print server.
NDS ERR: NO PRINTER
OBJECTS
37
Too many printer objects are assigned to the print server object. Using
NetWare utilities (such as NWADMIN), reduce the number of printer objects
assigned to the print server.
NDS ERR: MAX PRINT
OBJECTS
38
No print queue objects are assigned to the printer objects located in the
NDS directory.
NDS ERR: NO QUEUE
OBJECTS
39
Too many print queue objects are assigned to the printer. Reduce the
number of queues assigned.
NDS ERR: MAX QUEUE
OBJECTS
210 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
Error Code and Message Description
3A
The NDS tree cannot be located. The message may occur when the file
UND ERR: UNABLE TO FIND server is not running or when a network communications problem exists.
TREE
3B
The print server cannot change the NDS connection state. Check licenses
on the spooling server.
NDS CONNECTION STATE
ERROR
3C
The print queue object cannot be located in the specified NDS context.
NDS ERR: UNRESOLVED
QUEUE
3D
Cannot locate the file server on the network. The server may not be running
NDS ERR: CANNOT READ Q at this time or a communications problem may exist.
HOST
3E
Print Server Object Name mismatch. Unable to read the print server’s
NDS PRNT SRVR PUBLIC
KEY ERR
public key. Verify object names. Verify that the object key assigned to the
print server is a print server object and not a printer or other object.
3F
The NDS server address cannot be located or accessed.
UNABLE TO GET NDS SRVR
ADDR
40
The ARP layer has detected another node on the network using the same
IP address as the print server. Extended error information below this
message shows the hardware address of the other node.
ARP DUPLICATE IP
ADDRESS
41
The print server cannot read the contents of its NOVRAM. Cycle power on
the print server by unplugging is power cable and plugging it back in. If the
problem persists, perform a cold reset on the print server (while holding
down the test button on the back of the print server, plug the power module
back into the print server and continue to hold down the test button for
about five seconds. Any user-configured settings will be erased.) If the
problem still persists, call HP technical support for help. See the support
flyer that came with the product for information on contacting HP.
NOVRAM ERROR
42
The IP address specified for the print server (through BOOTP) is an invalid
IP address for specifying a single node. Check your Bootptab file for proper
entries.
INVALID IP ADDRESS
43
The IP subnet mask specified for the print server (through BOOTP) is an
invalid subnet mask. Check your Bootptab file for proper entries.
INVALID SUBNET MASK
44
The default gateway IP address specified for the print server (through
BOOTP) is an invalid IP address for specifying a single node. Check your
Bootptab file for proper entries.
INVALID GATEWAY
ADDRESS
45
The syslog server IP address specified for the print server (through
INVALID SYSLOG ADDRESS BOOTP) is an invalid IP address for specifying a single node. Check your
Bootptab file for proper entries.
EN
Interpreting the configuration page 211
Error Code and Message Description
46
The TFTP server IP address specified for the print server (through BOOTP)
INVALID SERVER ADDRESS is an invalid IP address for specifying a single node. Check your Bootptab
file for proper entries.
47
One of the SNMP trap (Trap PDU) destination IP addresses specified for
the print server (through TFTP) is an invalid IP address for specifying a
single node. Check your TFTP configuration file.
INVALID TRAP DEST
ADDRESS
48
The TFTP configuration file contained an incomplete last line that did not
end in a new line character.
CF ERR - FILE
INCOMPLETE
49
A line being processed in the TFTP configuration file was longer than the
CF ERR - LINE TOO LONG print server could accept.
4A
A TFTP configuration file line contained an unknown keyword.
CF ERR - UNKNOWN
KEYWORD
4B
A line in the TFTP configuration file was missing a required parameter.
CF ERR - MISSING
PARAMETER
4C
A line in the TFTP configuration file contained an invalid value for one of the
parameters on that line.
CF ERR - INVALID
PARAMETER
4D
The TFTP configuration file specified too many access list entries using the
CF ERR - ACCESS LIST
EXCEEDED
“allow:” keyword.
4E
The TFTP configuration file specified too many trap destination list entries
CF ERR - TRAP LIST
EXCEEDED
using the “trap-destination:” keyword.
4F
The TFTP transfer of the configuration file from the host to the print server
failed with the remote host sending a TFTP ERROR packet to the print
server.
TFTP REMOTE ERROR
50
The TFTP transfer of the configuration file from the host to the print server
failed with the local print server encountering some form of inactivity
timeout or excessive retransmissions situation.
TFTP LOCAL ERROR
51
The overall retrying of the TFTP transfer of the configuration file from the
TFTP RETRIES EXCEEDED host to the print server has exceeded a retry limit.
212 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
Error Code and Message Description
52
An error was detected in the BOOTP or DHCP reply that the print server
BAD BOOTP/DHCP REPLY
received. The reply either had insufficient data in the UDP datagram to
contain the minimum BOOTP/DHCP header of 236 bytes, had an operation
field that was not BOOTPREPLY(0X02), had a header field that did not
match the print server’s hardware address, or had a UDP source port that
was not the BOOTP/DHCP server port (67/udp).
53
The tagsize in a vendor-specific field in the BOOTP reply is either 0, or
greater than the remaining number of unprocessed bytes in the
vendor-specified area.
BAD BOOTP TAG SIZE
54
The print server is currently in the process of obtaining its basic IP
BOOTP/RARP IN PROGRESS configuration information through BOOTP/RARP.
55
The print server is currently in the process of obtaining its basic IP
BOOTP/DHCP IN PROGRESS configuration information through BOOTP/DHCP, and has not detected any
errors.
56
DHCP NAK
The print server received a negative acknowledgment message from the
DHCP server in response to a configuration request.
57
The print server had received IP parameters from a DHCP server, but
UNABLE TO CONNECT DHCP communication with the DHCP server has been lost. Check status of the
SVR
DHCP server.
If an infinite lease was assigned, the print server will use the IP address of
the most recent DHCP server used, but operation may be degraded until a
DHCP server responds.
58
The printer does not support AppleTalk or AppleTalk extensions.
POSTSCRIPT MODE NOT
SELECTED
59
Firmware download message. Currently downloading firmware to the print
INCOMPLETE F/W - MUST server, or the download did not complete properly.
DOWNLOAD
5A
Firmware download message. Download of firmware is complete. Power
cycle the print server.
TURN PRINTER OFF/ON
83 DISCONNECTING FROM The server has been shut down because of a configuration change or reset
SERVER
request. This message automatically clears after a few seconds, unless the
printer is off line, is in an error state, or is servicing another I/O port or
another network protocol.
F1
The print server is trying to connect to the NetWare server(s). This is a
normal message. Wait until either the connection is established or another
status message appears.
TRYING TO CONNECT TO
SERVER
EN
Interpreting the configuration page 213
Browse hp.com
General Information (http://www.hp.com/support/net printing)
(The central location on HP’s web site for the HP Jetdirect print servers and similar products)
Online Customer Forum (http://www.hp.com/go/forums)
(The central location on HP’s web site for the HP Jetdirect print servers and similar products)
Customer Support (http://www.hp.com/support/support_assistance)
(Lists all of the support options offered by HP and contact information such as phone numbers and
e-mail addresses)
For more information specific to the 310x print server, see the HP support web site for the HP
LaserJet 3300 series:
http://www.hp.com/support/lj3300 (site is in English)
214 16 Troubleshooting network problems
EN
Glossary
Term
Definition
10-BaseT
A type of Ethernet network that uses twisted pair cabling to attach nodes
to the network.
100-BaseTx
A type of Ethernet network, also known as Fast Ethernet, that uses
twisted pair cabling to attach nodes to the network.
10/100-BaseTx
This term indicates that a product is compatible with both 10-BaseT and
100-BaseTx. Many network products are compatible with both of these,
including some HP Jetdirect print server models.
1284-B
1284 is a parallel port standard developed by IEEE (the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers). 1284-B refers to a specific
connector type on the end of the parallel cable which attaches to the
peripheral (for example, a printer). A 1284-B connector is bigger than a
1284-C connector, for example.
actual size
ADF
The size of the page when it was scanned (not enlarged using zoom in or
reduced using zoom out).
Automatic document feeder. The ADF is used to automatically feed
originals into the product for copying, scanning, or faxing.
annotation
appletalk
A word, note, mark, or highlighting added to an item.
An inexpensive local area network architecture built into all Apple
Macintosh computers.
bit depth
.bmp file
The number of bits used to process scanned images. The greater the
number of bits, the more levels of gray that can be used to display the
image.
A Microsoft Windows bitmap file that has the extension .bmp. A bitmap file
defines an image (such as the image of a scanned page) as a pattern of
dots (pixels).
EN
215
BNC
A type of network connector generally used with coaxial network cabling.
A BNC connector has two slots that lock onto two matching knobs on a
network interface card when the connector can be twisted.
BOOTP
Short for Bootstrap Protocol, an Internet protocol that enables a diskless
workstation to discover its own IP address, the IP address of a BOOTP
server on the network, and a file to be loaded into memory to boot the
machine. This enables the workstation to boot without requiring a hard or
floppy disk drive. The protocol is defined by RFC 951.
brightness
A measure of the overall intensity of the image. The lower the brightness
value, the darker the image; the higher the value, the lighter the image will
be.
browser
Chooser
Short for Web browser, a software application used to locate and display
Web pages.
The Chooser is part of the Mac OS that allows configuration of the
computer system to print on any printer with the appropriate software.
Users that are part of an AppleTalk network system can use the Chooser
to activate and select among devices (such as printers, file servers, or
other computers) connected to the network.
client-server
A network architecture in which each computer or process on the network
is either a client or a server. Servers are powerful computers or processes
dedicated to managing disk drives, network traffic, and printers. Clients
are PCs or workstations on which users run applications. Clients rely on
servers for resources such as files and devices.
collapse
collate
The process of reducing a sticky note to an icon.
The process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collate is
selected, the HP LaserJet 3300 series product prints an entire set before
printing additional copies. Otherwise, the device prints the desired
number of copies of a page together before printing the following pages.
comma (,)
contrast
A comma in a dial sequence indicates that the fax machine will pause at
that point in the dialing sequence.
The difference between the dark and light areas of an image. The lower
the number value, the more closely the shades will resemble each other.
The higher the number, the more the shades will stand out from each
other.
container program
A program into which an OLE object is inserted. That program contains
the object.
crop
.dcx
To remove part of an image. The portion of the image that is selected
remains, while the portion that is not selected is removed.
A multi-page .PCX format where each page is a .PCX file. Since this is a
multi-page format, it is widely used for receiving and sending faxes to and
from the computer. A single DCX document can store up to 1,023 pages.
dedicated line
A single telephone line that is used exclusively for either voice calls or fax
calls.
216 Glossary
EN
DHCP
Short for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, a protocol for assigning
dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network. With dynamic addressing,
a device can have a different IP address every time it connects to the
network. In some systems, the device’s IP address can even change while
it is still connected. DHCP also supports a mix of static and dynamic IP
addresses.
Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the
software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an
administrator to manage the task. This means that a new computer can
be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a
unique IP address.
DIMMs
Dual In-line Memory Module, a small circuit board that holds memory. A
single in-line memory module (SIMM) has a 32-bit path to the memory,
whereas a DIMM has a 64-bit path.
distinctive ring
A feature offered by some telephone companies in Australia, Canada,
New Zealand, the United States, and the United Kingdom that allows two
or three phone numbers to be set up on the same telephone line. Each
phone number has a different ring pattern, and the fax machine can be
configured to recognize the distinctive ring of the fax number.
DLC
Short for Data Link Control. Every network interface card has a DLC
address or DLC identifier that uniquely identifies the node on the network.
dots per inch (dpi)
A measurement of resolution used for scanning and printing. Generally,
more dots per inch mean a higher resolution, a greater amount of visible
detail in the image, and a larger file size.
EconoMode
ECP
EconoMode is a toner-saving feature on the HP LaserJet product.
EconoMode reduces the amount of toner on a printed page, so that the
print cartridge lasts longer. The printed result is similar to printing a
document in draft mode.
Extended capabilities port, a parallel-port standard for PCs that supports
bi-directional communication between the PC and attached devices (such
as a printer).
e-mail (electronic mail)
embedded
An abbreviation for electronic mail. Software that can be used to
electronically transmit items over a communications network.
An object created with one application and embedded into a document
created by another application. Embedding the object, rather than simply
inserting it by pasting it, ensures that the object retains its original format.
The embedded object can be modified with the original program. In
Windows environments, embedding objects is made possible by a
technology called OLE.
Ethernet
A common type of local area network recognized as the industry
standard. Ethernet is also known as IEEE 802.3. Information is broken
into “packets” that are transmitted in order until they arrive at the
destination without colliding with any other “packet.” A network node is
either transmitting or receiving a packet at any instant.
expand
fax
A process to restore a collapsed sticky note from an icon to its original
size.
An abbreviation for facsimile. The electronic encoding of a printed page
and the transmission of the electronic page over a telephone line. The
product software can send items to electronic fax programs, which require
a modem and fax software.
EN
217
fax functions
fax settings
file format
Fax-related tasks done from the control panel that only affect the current
job, or are only done once before returning to the Ready state, such as
clearing memory. These functions are in their own section in the control
panel menu.
Fax-related items that, when set or changed, continue to use the choice
made until changed again. An example would be the number of times set
for the product to redial a busy number. These settings are in their own
section of the control panel menu.
The way the contents of a file are structured by a program or group of
programs.
.ftp
.gif
File Transfer Protocol, the protocol used on the Internet for sending files.
Graphics Interchange Format, an image used by CompuServe and other
online formats.
grayscale
halftone
Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image. Color
images can also be converted to grayscale where colors are represented
by various shades of gray.
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas
consist of a smaller number of dots.
.hpd
.HPD files are scanned documents that are saved using the HP LaserJet
Document Manager.
HP Jetdirect print server
An external, standalone print server. To use the HP LaserJet 3300 series
product on the network, the product (or a printer) can be connected to the
print server, instead of a computer, using a parallel cable. The print server
then connects to the network using a standard network connector. For the
HP LaserJet 3300 series product and its supported HP Jetdirect external
print servers, the connector can be 10-BaseT, 10/100BaseTx, BNC, or
token ring.
HP LaserJet Director
toolbar
An HP LaserJet 3300 series product software screen used when working
with documents. When the document is loaded into the document feeder
tray and the computer is connected directly to the product, the HP
LaserJet Director appears on the computer screen, allowing faxing,
copying, or scanning of the document to begin.
HP Web JetAdmin
software
Network peripheral management software allows configuration and
management from a computer of any peripheral connected to an
HP Jetdirect print server. For the HP LaserJet 3300 series product, the
HP JetAdmin or Web JetAdmin software (or BOOTP, DHCP, or telnet) may
or may not need to be used to configure the product on the network.
hub
A common connection point for devices in a network. Hubs are commonly
used to connect segments of a LAN. A hub contains multiple ports. When
a packet arrives at one port, it is copied to the other ports so that all
segments of the LAN can see all packets.
hypertext links
intranet
A link from one part of a document to another. When a linked word or
phrase or graphic is clicked, the user will jump to the linked word, phrase,
or graphic.
A network based on TCP/IP protocols (an internet) belonging to an
organization, accessible only by the organization’s members, employees,
or others with authorization. An intranet’s Web sites look and act just like
any other Web sites, but the firewall surrounding an intranet fends off
unauthorized access. Intranets are used to share information internally
within an organization.
218 Glossary
EN
IP address
IPP
An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. Networks
using the TCP/IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the
destination.
The Internet Printing Protocol defines the protocol for end users’ most
common printing situations over the Internet. The IPP allows users to: find
out about a printer’s capabilities, submit print jobs to a printer, find out the
status of the printer, and cancel a previously submitted job.
IPX/SPX
A network protocol made popular by Novell, Inc. as the basic protocol in
its Novell NetWare network operating system. In order for the HP LaserJet
3300 series product to work on the network, the TCP/IP or IPX/SPX
network protocol must be running.
.jpg
(also JPEG) Joint Photographic Experts Group, an international standard
for compressing digital photographic images.
LED
Light emitting diode, an electronic device that lights up when electricity is
passed through it. LEDs are usually red. They are good for displaying
images because they can be relatively small, and they do not burn out.
However, they require more power than LCDs.
link
A connection to a program or device that can be used to send information
from the product software to other programs, such as e-mail, electronic
fax, and OCR links.
Link Bar
The icons on the bottom of the desktop or viewer that represent programs
installed on a computer, such as e-mail software.
linked program
A program installed on a computer that can be used with the product
software. For example, OCR software can be used to translate a scanned
item into text.
NetWare
Novell, Inc.’s proprietary networking operating system for the PC
environment. NetWare uses the IPX/SPX or TCP/IP network protocols. It
supports MS-DOS, Microsoft Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, and Unix
clients.
node
A computer (server or user) or peripheral, such as the HP LaserJet 3300
series product, that is connected to a network.
Optical Character
Recognition (OCR)
software
OCR software converts an electronic image of text, such as a scanned
document, into a form that word processor, spreadsheet, and database
programs can use.
parallel cable
.pcx
See 1284-B.
A common graphic file format that many graphic programs accept. This is
a popular format in which to store scanned images.
peer-to-peer
A type of network architecture in which each workstation has equivalent
capabilities and responsibilities. Peer-to-peer networks are generally
simple, but they usually do not offer the same performance as
client-server architectures.
portable document viewer
PostScript fonts
A mini-program that can be attached to an electronic document and
e-mailed. The recipient will be able to view, annotate, and print the
document, no matter what program was used to create the document.
Fonts defined in terms of the PostScript language, intended to be printed
on a PS printer. PostScript fonts come as a screen font that appears on
the monitor and a matching printer font used by the product to create
documents.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
EN
219
PPD
PPD stands for PostScript Printer Description file. PPDs are used by the
printer driver and applications to determine the features and PostScript
commands supported in the product.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
print server
See HP Jetdirect print server.
printer driver
A printer driver is a program that enables applications to access a
product’s features. A printer driver translates an application’s formatting
commands (such as page breaks and font selection) into a printer
language (such as PostScript, PS, or PCL), and then sends the print file to
the product.
(The PD printer driver emulates Adobe PostScript® Level2. PostScript is a
registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.)
Private Branch Exchange
(PBX)
A small telephone switching system that typically is used by large
businesses or universities to connect all telephone extensions within the
organization. A PBX also connects to the public switched telephone
network (PSTN) and may be either manual or dial, depending on the
method used by extensions to place incoming or outgoing calls. Normally,
the equipment is owned by the customer rather than leased from the
telephone company.
public switched telephone
network (PSTN)
The worldwide dial-up telephone network or a portion of that network.
Users are assigned unique phone numbers, which allow them to connect
to the PSTN through local telephone exchange companies. Often, this
phrase is used when referring to data or other non-telephone services
carried over a path initially established using normal telephone signaling
and ordinary switched long distance telephone circuits.
resolution
RJ45
The sharpness of an image, measured in dots per inch (dpi). The higher
the dpi, the greater the resolution.
A network connector that looks much like a standard telephone connector,
except it is wider (it houses 8 wires instead of 4). Both Ethernet
(10/100Base-Tx) and Token Ring networks use this type of network
connector.
shared line
sticky note
A single telephone line that is used for both voice and fax calls.
An annotation that is a multiline, resizable note. Similar to a paper sticky
note, it covers the item information beneath it. A sticky note can be moved
or collapsed to an icon. Words can be searched for in a sticky note by
using the Find command.
surge protector
summary information
TCP/IP
A device that protects a power supply and communications lines from
electrical surges. All computers come with some surge protection built
into the power supply, but it is a good idea to purchase a separate device.
Information about the item, such as creator or keywords, can be added to
an item in the Summary Information dialog box to help find the item
quickly.
The de facto standard Ethernet protocol. TCP/IP stands for Transmission
Control Protocol over Internet Protocol. In order for the HP LaserJet 3300
series product to work on the network, the TCP/IP or IPX/SPX network
protocol must be running.
.tif
Tagged Image File Format, a .tif (or TIFF) is a graphic file format that was
developed to capture scanned images. It is a format used on
IBM-compatible computers, Macintosh computers, and UNIX computers.
Many graphic programs accept the .tif file format.
220 Glossary
EN
token ring
A local area network in which transmission conflicts are avoided by the
granting of “tokens” that give permission to send. A network node keeps
the token while transmitting a message, if it has a message to transmit,
and then passes the token on to the next node. IEEE 802.5 is the most
common type of token ring network.
TrueType fonts
TWAIN
TrueType fonts use what-you-see-is-what-you-get (WYSIWYG)
technology, which means that the printed output of TrueType fonts is
identical to what appears on the screen.
An industry standard for scanners and software. Using a
TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can
be initiated from within the program.
twisted pair
URL
A type of network cable commonly used in Ethernet networks.
Uniform resource locator, the global address of documents and resources
on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where
the resource is located.
USB cable
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc. to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike
the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single
computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
watermarks
A watermark adds background text to a document being printed. For
example, “Confidential” can be printed in the background text of a
document stating that the document is “Confidential.” A selection can be
made from a set of predefined watermarks, and the font, size, angle, and
style can be changed, as well as a determination made whether the
printer will place the watermark on the first page only or all pages.
Windows sharing
A method of peer-to-peer networking that uses Windows products with a
network installed, resources can be shared with co-workers, most
commonly the HP LaserJet 3300 series product, printers, and hard disks,
by simply using Windows tools such as Explorer and Print Manager.
When the HP LaserJet 3300 series product (or any printer) is shared
using Windows sharing, network users need to install the printer drivers
using the Add Printers utility in the Windows Printers folder.
workgroup
A collection of individuals working together on a task. Workgroup
computing occurs when all the individuals have computers connected to a
network that allows them to share data files, send e-mail to one another,
and schedule meetings.
zoom in
To make a page larger on the screen so more details can be seen.
zoom out
To make a page smaller on the screen so a broader view of the page can
be seen.
EN
221
222 Glossary
EN
HP LaserJet 3300 series product
●
●
Laser safety statement
HP LaserJet 3300 series product specifications
Environmental specifications
Operating environment
Storage environment
Printer plugged into an AC outlet:
●
Temperature: 15 to 32.5° C (59 to 90.5° F)
●
Relative Humidity: 10 to 80% (no condensation)
Printer unplugged from an AC outlet:
●
Temperature: -20° C to 40° C (-4° F to 104° F)
●
Relative Humidity: Less than 95% (no condensation)
Acoustics
Noise level
During copying*: 6.6 Bels sound power level (per ISO 9296)
●
Sound pressure level (bystander position): 50 dB
●
Sound pressure level (operator position): 59 dB
During standby and sleep mode: silent
* During other operations, acoustic results may vary.
Electrical specifications
Power requirements
●
●
110 to 127 volts +/-10%, 50 to 60 Hz +/-2 Hz (for 110 volt units)
220 to 240V +/-10%, 50 to 60 Hz +/-2 Hz (for 220 volt units)
Power consumption
●
●
●
●
During copying: 330 Watts (maximum)
During printing: 300 Watts (maximum)
During standby and power save: 14 Watts (maximum)
Off: 0 Watts
224 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information
EN
Physical specifications
Dimensions
●
●
●
Width: 546.1 mm (21.5 inches)
Depth: 520.7 mm (20.5 inches)
Height: 495.3 mm (19.5 inches)
Weight
●
●
Models with ADF: 15.8 kg (34.6 lbs)
Models without ADF: 14.1 kg (31.01 lbs)
Printer capacities and ratings
Print speed
●
●
15 pages per minute for letter size paper and 14 pages per minute for
A4 size paper
First page out in less than 10 seconds
Main input tray capacity
Priority input tray capacity
Output bin capacity
Minimum paper size
Maximum paper size
Media weight
250 sheets of regular weight 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper or up to 30 envelopes
10 sheets of regular weight 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper or 1 envelope
Up to 125 sheets of regular weight 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
●
●
Output bin – 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
Straight through media path – 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs)
Base memory
8 MB of ROM/Flash and 32 MB of RAM
Upgrade memory expansion
Print resolution
One DIMM slot available for an 8, 16, 32, or 64 MB RAM DIMM
1,200 dots per inch (dpi)
Duty cycle
●
●
10,000 single-sided pages per month (maximum)
1,000 single-sided pages per month (average)
PCL
Level 5e and 6
PostScript
Emulates Adobe PostScript® Level2
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated
Copier capacities and ratings
Copy speed Up to 15 pages per minute
EN
HP LaserJet 3300 series product 225
Multiple copies
Up to 99 per job
Copy reduction or enlargement 25 to 400%
Acoustic emissions (per ISO
9296) while copying
6.6 Bel sound power level
Scanner capacities and ratings
Margins for scanned items
3.05 mm (0.12 inch) left, 6.2 mm (0.248 inch) right
4.06 mm (0.16 inch) top and bottom
2,000 single-sided items per month
600 PPI color
Scanner Duty Cycle
Scan resolution
ADF specifications
Input capacity
Media weight
Media size
Up to 50 sheets of flat 16 lb or 20 lb (60-75 g/m2) media
16 lb (60 g/m2) to 24 lb (90 g/m2)
127 by 127 mm (5 by 5 inches) to 215.9 mm by 381 mm (8.5 by 15 inches)
Up to 11 pages per minute for Letter/A4 size
1,000 pages per month
Speed
Duty cycle
Memory specifications
DIMMs
100 pin, 66 MHz minimum speed
Port availability
USB
1.1
Parallel
●
●
IEEE 1284-B level 2 device with an IEEE 1284-B receptacle
Set host computer to ECP
Laser safety statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance
is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. This printer is certified as a “Class 1”
laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation
226 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information
EN
Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since
radiation emitted inside this printer is completely confined within protective housings and external
covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this
manual can result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
●
●
●
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
Note
Note
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
EN
HP LaserJet 3300 series product 227
Declaration of Conformity
The following Declaration of Conformity complies with ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014. It
identifies the product, manufacturer’s name and address, and applicable specifications recognized
in the European community.
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer's Name:
Hewlett-Packard Company
Manufacturer's Address:
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021 USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
LaserJet 3300/3310/3320/3330 Series
Model Number:
C9124A, C9125A, C9126A, C9151A, C9709A
(including Model C9143A ADF Accessory)
Product Options:
ALL
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
EMC:
IEC 60950:1991+A1:1992+A2:1993+A3:1995+A4:1996 /
EN 60950:1992+A1:1993 + A2:1993 + A3:1995 + A4:1997 + A11:1997
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997/
EN 60825-1:1994 + A11:1996 Class 1 Laser/LED Product
CISPR 22:1993 + A1:1995 + A2:1996 /
1)
EN 55022:1994 + A1:1995 + A2:1997 Class B
EN 61000-3-2:1995+A14:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995
EN55024:1998
2)
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B / ICES-002, Issue 2
AS / NZS 3548:1995 + A1 + A2:1997
3)
TELECOM
TBR-21:1998; EG 201 121:1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive
3)
89/336/EEC and carries the CE-marking accordingly.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) LaserJet 3330 (Model C9126A) contains fax functionality and is therefore compliant with the referenced telecom
standards and the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE-marking accordingly.
Boise, Idaho USA
August 14, 2001
Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130,
Australia.
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE /
Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034 Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015
(Phone: 208-396-6000)
228 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information
EN
Canada DOC regulations
This equipment complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques.
<< CEM>>.
Laser statement for Finland
LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
HP LaserJet 3300-laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa
käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1993) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas
för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 3300-kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa
avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi
ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa
lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman
erikoistyökaluja.
VARO!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa
toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig
laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 770-795 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
EN
HP LaserJet 3300 series product 229
Korean EMI statement
Japan VCCI Class B regulations
HP LaserJet 3330 fax
HP LaserJet 3330 product fax specifications
Fax transmission speed
3 seconds/page (ITU-T Test Image #1)
6.3 mm (0.25 inch)
Right/left margins for printed pages
Top/bottom margins for printed pages 5.08 mm (0.2 inch)
Fax compatibility
Fax coding schemes
Modem speed
ITU Group 3; ECM
MH, MR, and MMR
Up to 33,600 bits per second (bps)
Speed dialing
Yes
Yes
Distinctive ring detect
230 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information
EN
Fax resolution (standard)
Fax resolution (fine)
203 by 98 dots per inch (dpi)
203 by 196 dpi
Fax resolution (superfine)
Fax resolution (photo)
300 by 300 dpi (no halftone)
300 by 300 dpi (halftone enabled)
FCC Part 68 Requirements (US)
This equipment complies with FCC rules, Part 68. On the back of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number
(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone
company. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in
response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed
five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined
by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling
area.
This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This
equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a
compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on telephone
company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. If this
equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice isn't
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone
company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could
affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance
notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted
service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please see the numbers in the front of this
manual for repair and (or) warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until
the problem is resolved. The following repairs can be done by the customer: Replace any original
equipment that came with the product. This includes the print cartridge, the supports for trays and
bins, the power cord, and the telephone cord. It is recommended that the customer install an AC
surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. This is to avoid damage to the
equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
Telephone consumer protection act (US)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a
computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such
message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first
page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other
entity, or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or
such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided cannot be a 900
number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission
charges.) In order to program this information into your facsimile, please see Setting the
EN
HP LaserJet 3330 fax 231
IC CS-03 requirements
NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means the
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement
document(s). The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s
satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible for the
equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in
some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if
present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence
Number (REN) of this device is 0.7.
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed
five (5.0). The standard connecting arrangement code (telephone jack type) for equipment with
direct connections to the telephone network is CA11A.
Regulatory information for EU countries
This equipment has been designed to work in all of the countries of the European Economic Area
(Public Switched Telephone Networks) only. Network compatibility is dependent on internal
software settings. Contact your equipment supplier if it is necessary to use the equipment on a
different telephone network. For further product support, contact Hewlett-Packard at the phone
numbers provided in the support flyer that came with the product.
HP Jetdirect 310x print server
232 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information
EN
HP Jetdirect 310x print server specifications
Supported networks
Physical
●
●
Supports unshielded or shielded twisted pair cabling, using an RJ-45
connector for:
•
•
IEEE 802.3i 10Base-T (Ethernet)
IEEE 802.3u 100Base-Tx (Fast Ethernet)
Requires a 10/100Base-Tx network hub or concentrator that supports
link beat (link test pulse) signals.
Supported network operating
systems and protocols
●
●
●
●
Microsoft Windows 95, 98, 2000, ME, and XP (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 and later (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, DLC/LLC)
Apple Macintosh OS 8.6 and later (EtherTalk)
Novell NetWare v 3.11, 3.12, 4.x, 5.0 (IPX/SPX); NDS (IPX/SPX);
NDPS (IPX/SPX)
●
●
IBM OS/2 Warp v 3.0, 4.0 (TCP/IP), DLC/LLC)
HP-UX 10.x, 11.x; Solaris v2.5x, 2.6; SCO UNIX v86, 3.2, 4.2, 5.0; IBM
AIX v3.2.5 and later; MPE-ix v5.5 (TCP/IP)
●
●
Artisoft LANtastic 7.0 (DLC/LLC)
Line Printer Daemon (LPD)
Physical specifications
Interfaces
●
●
Network
See network specifications above
USB
Female “A” connector, complies with USB version 1.1 specifications
Dimensions
●
Width: 97 mm (3.8 inches) with clip attached, 92 mm (3.6 inches)
excluding clip and connectors
●
●
Length: 129 mm (5.1 inches)
Height: 45 mm (1.8 inches) with clip attached, 36 mm (1.4 inches)
excluding clip and connectors
Weight
●
108 g (3.9 oz.)
Environmental specifications
Operating environment
●
●
●
Temperature: 0° C to 55° C (32° F to 131° F)
Relative humidity: 15% to 95% at 40° C (104° F)
Altitude: 4.6 km
Storage environment
●
●
●
Temperature: -40° C to 70° C (-6° F to 158° F)
Relative humidity: 90% at 65° C (149° F)
Altitude: 4.6 km
EN
HP Jetdirect 310x print server 233
Electrical specifications
Power requirements
●
●
●
Input voltage
•
•
310x – 13 VDC
Nominal output voltage
•
•
310x – N/A
Power module – 13 VDC
Input current
•
•
310x – 140 mA @ 13 V
Power module – 100 mA (depending on your particular power
module)
●
●
Maximum output current
•
•
310x – N/A
Power module – 300 mA
Frequency range
•
•
310x – DC
Power module – 50/60 Hz (depending on your particular power
module)
Power consumption
●
●
310x – 1.8 W
Power module – 1.2 W
Electromagnetic immunity
Statement
Electromagnetic emissions
Regulations
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
US: FCC Part 15, Class B
Canada: ICES-003 (B)
Japan: VCCI Class 1
Europe: CISPR-22/EN55022 Class B
Taiwan: CNS 13438
Australia/New Zealand: AS/NZS 3548
Russia: GOST 292116
Safety
Compliance
The HP Jetdirect 310x print server complies with the following safety
regulations:
●
●
●
●
IEC 950: (1991)+A1, A2, A3, A4/EN60950 (1992)+A1, A2, A3, A4, A11
UL 1950
CSA 950
NOM-019-SCFI-1994, NOM-001-SCFI-1993
234 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information
EN
FCC compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
●
●
●
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that my cause undesired operation.
EN
HP Jetdirect 310x print server 235
Declaration of Conformity
This Declaration of Conformity complies with ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014. It identifies the
product, manufacturer’s name and address, and applicable specifications recognized in the
European community.
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014
Manufacturer's Name:
Hewlett-Packard Company
8000 Foothills Blvd.
Manufacturer's Address:
Roseville, CA 95747-5677 USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
HP Jetdirect 310x External Print Server
Model Number:
J6038A
All
Product Operations:
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
EN60950 (1992) +A1,A2,A3,A4,AII / IEC 950 (1991) +A1,A2,A3,A4
EN60825-1 (1994) / IEC 825-1 (1993), Class 1 (Laser/LED)
GB 4943 (1998)
EN 55022 (1998) / CISPR-22 (1997) Class B
EMC:
GB 9254 (1988)
EN 55024 (1998)
IEC 61000-4-2 (1995); EN 61000-4-2 (1995)
IEC 61000-4-3 (1995); EN 61000-4-3 (1996)
IEC 61000-4-4 (1995); EN 61000-4-4 (1995)
IEC 61000-4-5 (1995); EN 61000-4-5 (1995)
IEC 61000-4-6 (1996); EN 61000-4-6 (1996)
IEC 61000-4-8 (1993); EN 61000-4-8 (1993)
IEC 61000-4-11 (1994); EN 61000-4-11 (1994)
EN61000-3-2:1995 / EN61000-3-2 (1995)+A14
EN61000-3-3:1994 / EN61000-3-3 (1995)
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive
89/336/EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly.
This product was tested in a typical configurations with Hewlett-Packard Co. products.
Roseville, July 18, 2001
Mark Vigeant, Product Regulations Manager
European Contact: Your local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department
TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034 Böblingen (FAX:+49-7031-14-3143).
236 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information
EN
Australia
This equipment complies with Australian EMC requirements.
Canada
This equipment complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques.
<< CEM>>.
Japan VCCI Class 1 regulations
Korean EMI statement
EN
HP Jetdirect 310x print server 237
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our
environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).
Energy consumption
Energy usage drops significantly while in PowerSave mode, which saves natural resources and
saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. This product qualifies for
ENERGY STAR®, which is a voluntary program to encourage the development of energy-efficient
office products.
ENERGY STAR® is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined this product meets
ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy efficiency. For more information, see
http://www.energystar.gov/
Toner consumption
EconoMode/Toner Miser uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print
cartridge.
Paper use
resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the
ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet printing supplies
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing supplies (e.g., print cartridge, drum, fuser) can be
returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An easy to use
and free takeback program is available in over 48 countries. Multi-lingual program information and
instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and consumables package.
EN
Environmental product stewardship program 239
HP printing supplies returns and recycling program information
Since 1990, the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program has collected more than 47
million used LaserJet print cartridges that otherwise may have been discarded in the world's
landfills. The HP LaserJet print cartridges and consumables are collected and bulk shipped to our
resource and recovery partners who disassemble the cartridge. After a thorough quality
inspection, selected parts are reclaimed for use in new cartridges. Remaining materials are
separated and converted into raw materials for use by other industries to make a variety of useful
products.
US returns
For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and consumables, HP
encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the
single, pre-paid, pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more information,
visit the HP LaserJet Supplies web site at http://www.hp.com/go/recycle
Non-US returns
Non-US customers should call the local HP Sales and Service Office or visit the
http://www.hp.com/go/recycle web site for further information regarding availability of the HP
Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in
suitable for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19309.
Material restrictions
This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp, scanner, or liquid crystal display that
may require special handling at end-of-life.
This HP product contains lead in solder.
The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product have the following
specifications:
Type:
Lithium Carbon Monofluoride (solid button cell)
Weight:
approx. 1 gram
Location:
User Removable:
on formatter PC board (one battery per product)
No
For recycling information, you can contact www.hp.com/go/recycle or contact your local authorities
or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.
Material safety data sheets
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) can be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet Supplies web
site at http://www.hp.com/go/msds.
240 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information
EN
Extended warranty
HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP hardware product and all HP-supplied internal
components. The hardware maintenance covers a three-year period from date of the HP product
purchase. The customer must purchase HP SupportPack within 90 days of the HP product
purchase. For more information, contact the HP Customer Care Service and Support group. See
the support flyer that came with your product for information about contacting HP.
Spare parts and consumables availability
Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be available for at least five years after
production has stopped.
For more information
On HP’s environmental programs, including:
●
●
●
●
●
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
HP’s commitment to the environment
HP’s environmental management system
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
Material Safety Data Sheets
See: http://www.hp.com/go/environment or
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/
HP LaserJet 3300 series product battery
Battery material
Battery type
Poly-carbon Monoflouride Lithium
Button/coin cell battery
Quantity per product
Weight
1
Approximately 1 gram
Lithium type
Solid
Battery manufacturers
Rayovac, Madison, WI, USA; and Panasonic, Secaucus, NJ, USA.
EN
HP LaserJet 3300 series product battery 241
242 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information
EN
Appendix B
Warranties and licensing
Use thse topics to find out about product warantee and license information.
●
●
HP software license agreement
ATTENTION: USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE HP SOFTWARE LICENSE
TERMS SET FORTH BELOW. USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF
THESE LICENSE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS, YOU CAN
RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND. IF THE SOFTWARE IS BUNDLED WITH
ANOTHER PRODUCT, YOU CAN RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL
REFUND.
HP SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS
The following License Terms govern your use of the accompanying software unless you have a
separate signed agreement with HP.
License Grant. HP grants you a license to use one copy of the software. “Use” means storing,
loading, installing, executing, or displaying the software. You may not modify the software or
disable any licensing or control features of the software. If the software is licensed for “concurrent
use,” you may not allow more than the maximum number of authorized users to use the software
concurrently.
Ownership. The software is owned and copyrighted by HP or its third party suppliers. Your license
confers no title to, or ownership in, the software and is not a sale of any rights in the software. HP’s
third party suppliers can protect their rights in the event of any violation of these License Terms.
Copies and Adaptations. You may only make copies or adaptations of the software for archival
purposes or when copying or adaptation is an essential step in the authorized Use of the software.
You must reproduce all copyright notices in the original software on all copies or adaptations. You
may not copy the software onto any public network.
No Disassembly or Decryption. You may not disassemble or decompile the software unless HP’s
prior written consent is obtained.
In some jurisdictions, HP’s consent may not be required for limited disassembly or decompilation.
Upon request, you will provide HP with reasonably detailed information regarding any disassembly
or decompilation. You may not decrypt the software unless decryption is a necessary part of the
operation of the software.
Transfer. Your license will automatically terminate upon any transfer of the software. Upon transfer,
you must deliver the software, including any copies and related documentation, to the transferee.
The transferee must accept these License Terms as a condition to the transfer.
EN
HP software license agreement 243
Termination. HP may terminate your license upon notice for failure to comply with any of these
License Terms. Upon termination, you must immediately destroy the software, together with all
copies, adaptations, and merged portions in any form.
Export Requirements. You may not export or reexport the software or any copy or adaptation in
violation of any applicable laws or regulations.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The software and any accompanying documentation have
been developed entirely at private expense. They are delivered and licensed as “commercial
computer software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS 252.211-7015 (May
1991), or DFARS 252.227-7014 (Jun 1995), as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101 (a),
or as “Restricted computer software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun 1987) (or any equivalent
agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those rights provided
for such software and any accompanying documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause
or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved.
HP limited warranty statement
HP LaserJet 3300 product ONE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY
1
2
3
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware, accessories, and supplies will
be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period
specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at
its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products
may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after
the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and
workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during
the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming
instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP
is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as
warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the
product.
4
5
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have
been subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or
calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts, or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized
modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for
the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
6
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE
EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR
ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow
limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might
not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other
rights that vary from country to country, state to state, or province to province.
7
HP’s limited warranty is valid in any country or locality where HP has a support presence for
this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you
receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit, or function of the
product to make it operate in a country for which it was never intended to function for legal or
regulatory reasons.
244 Appendix B Warranties and licensing
EN
8
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED
ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR
FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT, OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION
TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT
TO YOU.
EN
HP limited warranty statement 245
246 Appendix B Warranties and licensing
EN
Appendix C
Service and support
Use these topics to learn about obtaining product service and support.
●
●
●
Obtaining hardware service
To obtain hardware service
If your hardware should fail during the warranty period, HP offers the following support options:
●
●
HP repair services. You can return the product to an HP repair center, depending on your
location.
Express Exchange. In some places, HP provides a reconditioned permanent replacement
product to you on the next working day.
●
●
HP authorized service provider. You can return the unit to a local authorized service dealer.
Express pick-up and delivery. HP will arrange to pick up the product, repair it, and return it
to you within 5 to 10 days, depending on your location.
Returning the unit
When shipping equipment, HP recommends insuring it. Also, include a copy of your proof of
purchase. Please also fill out the “Service information form” to ensure the most accurate repairs.
CAUTION
Shipping damage resulting from inadequate packaging is the customer’s responsibility. See
Repackaging guidelines below.
Repackaging guidelines
●
unit, and send the self-test report with the unit.
●
Remove and retain the print cartridge.
CAUTION
Toner left in the printer during shipping can damage the product.
●
Include the completed copy of the service information form below. Note on the form which
items were returned.
●
●
Use the original shipping container and packaging materials, if possible.
Include samples that illustrate the problems you are having, if applicable.
EN
Obtaining hardware service 247
●
Include five sheets of the paper or other media that are causing trouble in printing, scanning,
faxing, or copying.
Extended warranty
HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP product and all HP-supplied internal components.
The hardware maintenance covers a one- to-five year period from date of the HP product
purchase. The HP SupportPack can provide Express Exchange or onsite service. The customer
must purchase HP SupportPack within 180 days of the HP product purchase. Get more support
or contact the Customer Care Service and Support group; see the support flyer that came with
your product for the appropriate phone numbers and information.
Service information form
Service information form
Who is returning the equipment?
Date:
Person to contact:
Phone:
Phone:
Alternate contact:
Return shipping address:
Special shipping
instructions:
What is being sent?
Model number:
Serial number:
Please attach any relevant printouts when returning equipment. Do not ship accessories that
are not required to complete the repair (for example, media trays, manuals, and cleaning
supplies).
What needs to be done?
1. Describe the conditions of the failure (What was the failure? What were you doing when the
failure occurred? What software were you running? Can you make the failure reoccur?).
2. If the failure is intermittent, how much time elapses between failures?
3. Is the unit connected to any of the following? (Please provide manufacturer and model
numbers.)
Personal Computer:
Modem:
Network:
4. Additional comments:
248 Appendix C Service and support
EN
EN
Service information form 249
250 Appendix C Service and support
EN
|
